The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutMiscellaneous - 120 R MAIN STREET 4/2/1997 April 2, 1997 CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS for NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts VOLUME TWO Submitted by: Facility Design and Management, Inc. 855 Turnpike Street North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 April 2, 1997 CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS for NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts VOLUME TWO Submitted by: Facility Design and Management, Inc. 855 Turnpike Street North Andover, Massachusetts 01845 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME ONE Specifications dated April 2, 1997 Pages Title Sheet 1 Table of Contents 4 ADVERTISEMENT (Invitation to Bid) 2 BIDDING DOCUMENTS Instructions to Bidders 6 Form for General Bid 9 Form for Sub-Bid 8 SOMBA Certified Enterprise Participation Schedules 1 Letter of Intent 1 CONTRACT FORMS Form of Owner-Contractor Agreement 3 Form of Contractor's Equal Employment Certification 1 Form of Performance Bond 2 Form of Payment Bond 1 Form of Subcontract 2 Form of Subcontractor's Equal Employment Certification 1 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT General Conditions of the Contract 24 (A.I.A. Document A201, 1987 Edition) 00800 Supplementary Conditions 28 00900 Workforce/Other Requirements 8 00910 Federal Labor Standards Provisions 35 Workforce Employment Utilization Report Forms 00920 Assurance of Compliance (Section 3, HUD Act of 1968) 2 00950 Federal Labor Rates 17 00955 Massachusetts Minimum Labor Rates 5 Massachusetts Weekly Payroll Record Report Forms 00960 Massachusetts MBE Requirements 5 00970 Massachusetts Anti-Discrimination and Affirmative Action Program 6 00980 Massachusetts Workforce Employment Utilization Report Forms 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1 CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS Section 01100 Alternates 1 Section 01155 Schedule, Reports, Workmanship, Code Requirements 3 Section 01205 Procedures and Performances 9 Section 01340 Submittals 7 Section 01505 Temporary Facilities 7 VOLUME TWO Specifications dated April 2, 1997 Test Borings Section 02000 Removal of Existing Work 7 Section 02205 Excavation 11 Section 02215 Filling, Backfilling and Grading 9 Section 02500 Paving and Surfacing 2 Section 02515 Site Improvements 3 Section 02720 Site Utilities 9 Section 03300 Concrete On Drawings Section 04200 Unit Masonry Filed Sub-Bid 11 Section 05125 Structural Steel On Drawings Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 10 Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 10 Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 9 Section 07200 Building Insulation 5 Section 07310 Shingles Filed Sub-Bid 8 Section 07530 Flexible Sheet Roofing Filed Sub-Bid 7 Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 6 Section 07900 Caulking and Sealants 4 Door Schedule Section 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 9 Section 08210 Wood Doors 5 Section 08305 Access Doors 3 Section 08335 Rolling Counter Fire Shutter 6 Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances 5 Section 08520 Aluminum Windows 7 Section 08700 Builders Hardware 13 Section 08800 Glass and Glazing 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2 CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS Room Finish Schedule Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall Filed Sub-Bid 12 Section 09510 Acoustical Ceiling 7 Section 09650 Resilient Flooring 8 Section 09680 Carpeting 6 Section 09700 Resin Flooring 4 Section 09900 Painting Filed Sub-Bid 13 Section 10162 Toilet Partitions 5 Section 10520 Fire Extinguisher 3 Section 10530 Built-in Specialties 2 Section 10540 Fire Suppression System 2 Section 10650 Electrically Operated Partition 5 Section 10800 Toilet Accessories 4 Section 15000 Mechanical Filed Sub-Bid 21 Section 15300 Fire Protection Filed Sub-Bid 7 Section 15400 Plumbing Filed Sub-Bid 18 Section 15500 Mechanical (HVAC) Filed Sub-Bid 41 Section 16000 Electrical Filed Sub-Bid 47 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3 CONTRACT DRAWINGS Drawings dated May 14, 1997 Civil Boundary Plan C-1.0 Civil Existing Conditions C-1.1 Civil Existing Utilities C-1.2 Civil Proposed Site Plan C-1.3 Civil Utility Layout C-1.4 Civil Grading C-1.5 Civil Details C-1.6 Architectural Floor Plan A-1.0 Architectural Roof Plan A-2.0 Elevations A-3.0 Alternates A-3.1 Architectural Building Cross Sections A-4.0 Wall, Column, Beam, Roof Types A-5.0 Architectural Wall Sections A-6.0 Architectural Wall Sections A-6.1 Architectural Wall Sections A-6.2 Architectural Wall Sections A-6.3 Architectural Wall Sections A-6.4 Architectural Roof Details A-7.0 Interior Elevations and Details A-8.0 Interior Elevations and Details A-8.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan A-9.0 Structural Foundation Plan S-1 Structural Details S-2 Structural Framing Plan S-3 Underground Piping P-1 Piping P-2 Mechanical Floor Plan and Details M-1 Electrical Site Plan E-1 Electrical Lighting Plan E-2 Electrical Power Plan E-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 4 S32°-14 00"E 6' CLF 220.5 ' itI � CB9 CBl w I- u z U CB RIM 18.99 � r i 4" INV 16.8 (l L" INV 16.4 i CB RIM 19.99 0 20.00' INVS 16.2 Lo I MHI TEST BORING a I CB8 I a CB RIM 80.25 INVS 11.3 o w PROPOSED ADDITION 0 p 0 TEST Ln O BORING 22 I I °0 10.00' - o F- 1.17 I 3 z Q 12"RCP EXISTING SENIOR CENTER cB5 MH3 ce 3195 SQUARE FEET 5MHI I CLEANOUT I MH5 GQ I AREA cg � � GRAIN a❑ RIM 82.89 TEST BORING Project: N. ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER Sheet 1 Of 1 N Andover. MA Boring No B-2 MILLER ENGINEERING 6 TESTING.INC. Project No: 70058.01 Location: by client Date Start: 2/28/97 Date End: 2/28/97 Surface Elev- Casing Sampler Groundwater Observations Type Hollow Stem Auger Split spoon DATE DEPTH CASING AT STABILIZATION PERIOD Size 3-3/4" ID 1-3/8" ID N/A Hammer 140 pounds Fall ___ 30 inches Cas SAMPLE bl/ Strata Depth tt No. Depth Pen. Rec. Blows/6" Change Sample Description Notes �� " 2_22 S-1: Grey, medium sand and gravel. (1) _2 28-30 50' S-2 4.0-6.0' 24" 14" 11-25 S-2: Light brown, fine to medium sand, 27-33 trace gray gravel. 10.01 S-3 9.0-10.0' 11" 5" 6-50/5" S-3: Light brown, glacial till, little grey gravel. 15.0' 15.0' (2) Auger refusal @ 15.0' 20.0' 25.0' 30.0' Driller. R. White COHMVE COMSISTENcY(lbws/FOOD COHEPONLM DOOM(ew../FeeO PROPORTIONS USED 0. 2 VERY SOFT 0• VERY LOOSE TRAM@ 0•,ox R. GrandIDOnt 2• t SOFT t-10 LOOSE UTTLE 10-lox Helper. 1. a MEDIUM STIFF. . 10.30 MEDIUM 004SE SOME 20-35% e•15 STIFF 30-50 DENSE AND 35.50% Inspector. Is•30 HARD 50• VERY DENSE -. - NOTES (1) Asphalt 4" (2) Auger grinding 2.0-15.0' REMARKS' THE STRATIMAT)ON LIES REPRESENT THE AAPROIOMATE 8OQ*OARY BETWEEN SOIL TYPES TRANSrnON MAY BE GRADUAL WATER LEVEL. READniGSHAVE BEEN MADENTHEDRI11HOLESAT TIMESANDU DEACONOn-04STATEDON THE BORNG LOGS FUXTWTOONS INTHE LEVELOF THE GROUNDWATER MAY OOCUR DUE TO OTHER FACTORS THAN THOSE PRESENT AT THE TIME MEASUREMENTS WERE MADE. TEST BORING Project: N. ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER Sheet 1 of 1 N. Andover, MA Boring NO: B-1 MILLER ENGINEERING b TESTING.INC. Project No: 70058.01 Location: by client Date Start: 2/28/97 Date End: 2/28/97 Surface Elev: Casing Sampler Groundwater Observations Type Hollow Stem Auger Split Spoon DATE DEPTH CASING AT STABILIZATION PERIOD Size 3-3/4" ID 1-3/8" ID N/A Hammer --- 140 pounds Fall --- 30 inches Cas SAMPLE bl/ Strata Depth tL No. Depth Pen. Rec. Blows/6" Change Sample Description Notes S-1 0.0-2.0' auger s m le S-1: Brown, fine to medium sand, little (1) grey, medium gravel. 5.0' S-2 1 4.0-6.0' 24" 12" 26-26 S-2: Light brown, fine to medium sand 30-32 and gravel, trace grey, medium gravel. 7.0' (2) Auger refusal @ 7.0' 10.0, 15.0' 20.0' 25.0' 30.0' Driller. R. white coHFS1YE corssTrNCY(Blo.a/c«,p ooHESloraESS DEHSIn lBw.siFooO PROPORTIONS USED 2 VERY SOFT 0. 4 VERY LOOSE TRACE 0.10% Helper R. Grandmont 2' 4 SOFT 4.10 LOOSE LITTLE 10-20% I� !- ! MEDIUM STIFF _.._ 10.30 MEDIUM DENSE SOME 20.35% 0.13 STIFF 30.50 0� AND: 35_50% Inspector 16-30 HARD ... 50• VERY DENSE NOTES (1) Asphalt 3" (2) Auger grinding 1.0-7.0' REMARKS: THE STRATIFICATION LNEs REPRESENT THE ApM)0,ATE go Be BETVIEEN SOL TYPM TMNsT ON MAY BE GRADUAL WATER LE VEL READINGS HAVE BEENMADENTHE OE HALES AT TIMES UNDER CONDRIONS STATED ON THE BORING LOGS FLUCTUATIONS N THE LEVELOF THE GAOIMOWATER MAY OCCUR OUE TO OTHER FACTORS THAN THOSE PRESENT AT THE TIME MEASUREMENTS WERE ANDS. TEST BORING LOG Project: N. ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER Sheet 1 of 1 N. Andover, MA Boring No: B-1A MILLER ENGINEERING&TESTING.INC. Project No: 70058.01 Location: by client Date Start: 2/28/97 Date End: 2/28/97 Surface Elev: Casing Sampler Groundwater Observations Type Hollow Stem Auger Split Spoon DATE DEPTH CASING AT STABILIZATION PERIOD Size 3-3/4" ID 1-3/8" ID N/A Hammer 140 pounds Fall 30 inches Cas SAMPLE bl/ Strata Depth R No. Depth Pen. I Rec. Blows/6" Change Sample Description Notes er s m le S-1: Brown, fine sand with mix of (1) brown coarse gravel. 5.0' 7.0' (2) Auger refusal @ 7.0' 10.0' 15.0' 20.0' 25.0' 301), Driller R. white GpIFyyE COHStSTE11GY(B-FO,4 CoHEStoNnFSS 004"Wl SIFWQ PROPORnONS USED 0- 2 VERY SOFT 0. 4 VERY LOOSE TRACE 0-10% Helper. R. Grandmont i e � � 0-35 - MEDIUM STFF. 10•30 MEDUM DENSE E 2359 S-Ts STIFF 30-W DENSE AND: 35,50% Inspe 15.00 HARD 50. VERY DENSE ctor. NOTES (1) Asphalt 3" (2) Auger grinding 1,0-7.0' REMARKS' THE STRAT"TION LINES REPRESENT THE APPROMWE BOUNDARY BETWEEN 500.TYPES TRANSn10N MAY BE GRADUAL WATER LEVEL READWI S HAVE BEEN MADE LATHE DRILLHOLESATMUESANOUNDER COMMONS STATED ONTHE SORPNG LOGS.FLUCTUATIONS N THE LEVELOF ". THE GROUNDWATER MAY OCCUR DUE TO OTHER FACTORS THAN THOSE PRESENT AT THE THE MEASUREMENTS WERE MADE. 4-S13 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02000 - REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK: PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation to complete all demolition and removal of existing work within existing buildings, including all work incidental thereto as specified herein, as shown on drawings, or both. 1. All required demolition of existing exterior foundation walls, site walls, stair, walks, paving, curbing, site utilities (overhead and underground); and all exterior and interior partitions walls, floors, ceilings, and other exterior and interior architectural surfaces and structural components within the existing building. 2. Cutting and Patching. 3. Dust control, barricades, signs, and other enclosures. 4. Storage and protection of existing materials to be removed and reused. 5. Disposal of debris. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 02000 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: (Continued) C. Related Work in Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Removal of furniture, equipment and furnishings in work area of existing buildings which is not physically attached to the building, will be done by the Owner except as otherwise specified herein. 2. Disconnecting of existing services and fixtures as required, shall be done by the respective mechanical and electrical trades. 3. Contractor's work under Procedures and Performances Section 01205 affecting demolition and removal of work. 4. Removal and storage of plumbing and electrical fixtures to be relocated, if any, under respective MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL Sections. 5. Installation of new work in prepared areas. 6. Excavation Section 02205. 7. Filling and Backfilling Section 02215. 1.02 PERMITS AND CODES: A. Demolition and removal shall be as indicated on Drawings and shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. B. Comply with all municipal, state, and federal rules, regulation, laws and ordinances and all other authorities having jurisdiction. C. Procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for demolition and removal of work. D. Comply also with applicable provisions of American National Standard Code for Building Construction ANSI A10.6 - 1969 Safety Requirements for Demolition. 02000 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 CONDITIONS OF WORK: A. Conduct the work giving consideration to protection of the public; protection of existing work from the weather; control of noise, shocks and vibration; control of dirt and dust; orderly access and storage of materials; protection of existing buildings; protection of adjacent buildings and property. Coordinate work and cooperate with the Owner at all times. B. Schedule demolition and removal work in connection with the progress schedule required by the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. C. Temporary hoists, staging, scaffolding and other similar appurtenances required for the execution or demolition and removal work shall be maintained so as to avoid all staining and marring of existing work. D. Coordinate and cooperate with mechanical and electrical trades for disconnecting, rerouting and maintenance of existing services in the buildings as required. 1.04 USE OF PREMISES: A. All apparatus, storage and the operation of workmen in connection with activities under this Section shall be confined to limits of the Contract as shown on the Drawings and shall not encumber areas outside the site. B. Trucks carrying loose, dry material such as debris, broken concrete block, plaster, etc., shall be covered by tarpaulins to prevent blowing away or spillage of contents. All spillage of whatever nature shall be promptly take up and removed. 1.05 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND PLATFORMS: A. Erect and maintain weatherproof enclosures where required to control outside elements and remove and/or relocate same as required during the removal of existing work and at completion of work under this Section. 02000 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND PLATFORMS: (Continued) B. Platforms shall be constructed below areas to be demolished of sufficient height and strength to prevent any demolished concrete and other work from striking the floor below. Protection shall include all necessary railings, curbing, etc., as required, in addition to requirements of applicable municipal codes. C. Provide and maintain all protective devices, including fences, barricades, bracing, shoring, planking, guards, warning lights and signs,as necessary or required for protection against personal injury or damage to property. Conform to ANSI ALC 6-1969. 1.06 PRECAUTIONS FOR THE REMOVAL OF WORK: A. The removal of portions of structures shall be done with care, using tools and methods that will not transfer heavy shocks to remaining portions of the buildings. Care shall be taken to avoid vibration and other disturbances. The use of explosive will not be permitted. B. Demolition of exterior walls or other weather protection shall not be started until temporary enclosures are available or in place and approved by the Architect. C. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be sprinkled during handling and loading. Sprinkling will not be allowed within the buildings. D. Carefully remove existing items to be reused or relocated or turned over to the Owner; handle same to preserve undamaged condition. E. Store items to be reused or relocated; protect from weather and construction damage. Storage shall be arranged to facilitate inspection by Architect and Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing items removed under this Section which are to be reused, relocated or turned over the the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT APPLICABLE) 02000 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF GENERAL WORK: A. Before starting removal work, arrange for the disconnection of active utility services in areas to be worked in, if required. All work on existing utilities shall be done by the respective subtrades or other authorities having jurisdiction. Notify all corporations, companies, individuals or local authorities owning, or having jurisdiction over, utilities running to, through or across areas disturbed by demolition operations. B. Cutting shall be done by abrasive wheels, saws or coring drills. Do not use jackhammers, without Owner's specific approval of each case. C. All existing items removed as part of work under this Section, except items to be reused or relocated, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed of, off the site at his expense, unless such existing items to be removed are specifically to be turned over to the indicated Owner. D. Remove portions of existing interior and exterior walls, partitions, slabs and other work as indicated on Drawings. E. Where new work joins or abuts existing work, cutting shall be carefully and accurately done. Where masonry units are required to be removed, remove same by "toothing" units at jambs and field of partitions or walls. F. Openings over 6" in diameter shall be made by the Contractor. Cutting and Patching as required shall be performed under the work of this Section. G. The indicated and required deactivation and removal of plumbing, mechanical and electrical fixtures, piping, conduits and controls, rerouting services connected to existing fixtures to remain active; removal of services connected to existing fixtures to be removed, shall be part of the Mechanical and Electrical Sections of the Specifications. The relocation of existing equipment shall be as indicated and schedules on the drawings, and as specified under other Sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal of any plumbing, mechanical, and electrical fixtures, piping, conduit and controls which is not required to be removed by the subtrades but is required for the new work to be done. 02000 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE: A. Cut openings as indicated on Drawings or required by Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and/or sprinkler drawings or specifications and not specified under individual trade. Edges shall be marked on top and bottom surface of the slab before commencing any cutting operation. B. Opening edges shall be scored to 1/2" maximum depth by sawing top surface of slab and soffitt where exposed. In no case shall existing reinforcing bars be cut by sawing. C. Concrete within the scored edges shall be removed by jackhammering. Care shall be taken to prevent concrete spalling off or cracking past the scored edges. Riding the jackhammer on existing reinforcing bars shall be avoided. D. Edges shall be chipped clean by hand such that no loose or cracked material remains. Top and bottom surfaces beyond the opening edges shall be inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be chipped open to a depth and width of 1/2" and patched with approved non-shrink grout in a manner acceptable to the Architect. E. Reinforcing bars shall be cut with oxygen cutting torch. Care shall be taken to ensure severed bar ends are square and in alignment. F. Prior to the first jackhammering and cutting of reinforcing bar operations, the Architect shall be notified so that inspection of procedures can be arranged. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WORK REMOVED: A. Remove from the site at regular intervals, all refuse and debris which accumulates as a result of work under this Section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and his subcontractors to make required arrangements for legal disposal of such material in connection with their respective work. B. Do not drop or throw materials from upper stories but lower them by means of hoists or chutes. C. Bum no debris on the site. 02000 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 CLEANING UP A. Keep all work areas free from accumulation of debris during the course of work under this Section. Work areas shall be swept daily. B. At the completion of demolition and removal work, all rubbish, debris, waste, materials and salvaged materials from and about the building structures, including all tools, scaffolds, apparatus and appliances used in connection with work under this Section shall be removed and the premises shall be left in clean condition, ready for addition and alteration work. END OF SECTION 02000 02000 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02205 - EXCAVATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The scope, without limiting the generality thereof, consists of: 1. Laying out lines and levels for all work. 2. Clearing and removing rubble, bituminous paving, concrete pads, buried/abandoned foundations and footings, underground utilities, and/or other materials within the Contract Limits lines. Contract Limit lines shall be defined as the line measured fifty feet (50') away from and parallel to the existing senior center building, the fenced area along Saunders Street, the fenced area along the R-4 property, and a line measured equal distance, approximately fifteen feet (15'), between the existing senior center building and the existing town hall. 3. Clearing and removal of seven existing trees and twenty-five shrubs located along the R-4 property line fence. Removal of the various shrubs adjacent to the existing building with be the responsiblity of the Town of North Andover. Contractor shall protect those trees adjacent to the Saunders Street property line and in particular the four trees in the comer where the new utility lines will be run. 4. Removal and storage for reuse of granite curbing. 5. Stripping, stockpiling, and reuse or disposal of topsoil. 6. Excavating for subsurface areas, foundation footings, piers, pits, and other areas requiring general or hand excavating. 02205 - 1 412/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) 7. Excavating for utility lines, electrical conduit, data, telephone, and fire alarm lines. 8. Excavating for all concrete and bituminous concrete pavement. 9. Performing and pumping and bailing necessary to maintain excavated spaces free from water from any source. 10. Rough grading of areas to receive new work, or areas which are to be developed for turf areas. 11. Disposal of surplus and/or unsuitable materials legally off site. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these Specifications: 1. Procedures and Performances Section 01205 2. Temporary Facilities Section 01505 3. Filling and Backfilling Section 02215 4. Paving Section 02500 5. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 6. Fire Protection Utilities Services Section 15300 7. Plumbing Utilities Services Section 15400 8. Electrical/Telephone Services Section 16000 D. Related Work Bv Others: The following items of associated work are to be performed by others: 1. Removal of shrubs and planting around the front of the existing building shall be performed by the North Andover Departmentof Public Works. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Excavation work shall be performed in accordance with applicable requirements of Commonwealth of Massachusetts. 02205 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) 2. Excavation work shall conform to applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute, "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition" Standard A10.3 through A10.13 through A10.17 and A10.21 (1969-1975) and as supplemented hereinafter. B. Testing Reports and Inspection Services: 1. Owner may engage soils engineer for quality control testing during earthwork operations. 2. Subsurface information prepared by the Owner's soils engineer is included and is to be considered as part of the Contract Documents. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handling Materials: The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the public roads, private and public properties clear of all spillage from trucks hauling earthwork materials either from or to the project site. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Existing Utilities: 1. Existing utility lines and underground structures that are shown on the Contract Drawings or the locations of which have been made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained, as well as work constructed during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during excavation. Contractor shall arrrange for contact DIG-SAFE or a company specializing in underground utility line locations, prior to any excavation. Any damage to lines or structures which occurs during the Contractor's operations shall be immediately repaired in a manner satisfactory to the local authority and/or private utility concerned, the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor. 02205 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: (Continued) 2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Utility Owner immediately for directions. "Incorrectly charted" shall be defined as meaning that the actual location of the utility line being greater than ten (10) feet in either direction of that shown on the drawings or location(s) of which have been made known to the Contractor prior to excavation. Cooperate with Owner and Utilities Companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation as required. Repair damage utilities to satisfaction of Utility Owner, the cost of which shall be borne by the Owner. 3. Do not interrupt existing utilities, if encountered, serving occupied facilities, except when permitted in writing by Architect; and then only after acceptable temporary utilities services have been provided. 4. Make all necessary arrangements and perform any necessary work required for disconnection of those public utilities and services entering onto the job site which are required to be removed. Work shall be performed to the satisfaction of the utilities companies and municipal town departments involved. Plug all pipes and conduits to the abandoned with bricks and mortar where there are encountered. Pay any fees or costs which may result from this work. B. Protections of Persons and Pro e : Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate measures of protection with work in Section 01205 PROCEDURES AND PERFORMANCES and Section 01505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES. 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on the Owner's property. 3. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction at no increased cost to the Owner. 02205 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BENCH MARKS AND ENGINEERING: A. Lines and grade work in accordance with drawings and specifications shall be laid out by a reistered Civil Engineer or Surveyor employed by the Contractor. 3.02 INSPECTION: A. Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading are to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.03 SITE PREPARATION AND CLEARING: A. General: 1. Prior to starting site clearing operations, stake out the building, roads and edges of parking and walkway areas, limits of cut and fill. B. Topsoil: 1. Prior to starting general excavation, any remaining topsoil shall be stripped from areas to be regraded and resurfaced and shall be screened and stockpiled in approved locations for later reuse. Topsoil is defined as friable clay foam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material, and shall meet all requirements of Loam Borrow specified under Section 02930 LAWNS. 2. Do not strip without a clear understanding of existing soil, planting and site conditions to be preserved. 3. Under no conditions may topsoil be taken away from the premises without the approval of the Architect. 02205 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 SITE PREPARATION AND CLEARING:(Continued) 4. Topsoil shall be carefully removed to the full depth, transported and deposited in storage piles in areas shown, or where otherwise directed by the Architect. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent windblown dust. C. Clearine and Grubbing: 1. The Contractor shall accept the site as he finds it and shall remove all tree shrubs and vines designated for removal and all debris, organic matter and objectionable material which is not suitable for use as fill or for support of structural loads or slabs, and legally dispose of off-site. 2. The Contractor shall remove all stumps, roots over four inches (4") in diameter, and matted roots to a depth of not less than eighteen (18") below original ground level for trees. Unless further excavation is required, depressions made by grubbing soil and the surface shall conform to the contour of the adjacent ground. D. Rough Grading: 1. Machine grade site area. Rough grades, unless otherwise specified, shall be approximately 6 inches below bottom of interior slabs on grades, 6 inches below bottom of paving, 8 inches below bottom of concrete walks, concrete pavers, and exterior slabs on grades, and 4 inches below finish grades in areas to be loomed and seeded. Fills, if required, shall conform to the requirements of the Section 02215 FILLING AND BACKFILLING. 3.04 EXCAVATION: A. General: 1. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the drawings or required for the work. Legally dispose of any excess or unsuitable material off-site. Include excavation for all building, sewage, drainage, utilities and service structures. 02205 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 EXCAVATION: (Continued) 2. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data or subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. 3. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of materials encountered when establishing required grade elevations. 4. Excavations shall extend a sufficient distance from structures to allow for placement and removal of forms, installation of services and inspection. 5. Protect existing foundations from being underminedduring excavation for new foundations. 6. Foundations which are not pile supported shall bear on natural, undisturbed stiff clay soil. The Contractor shall notify the Architect when a foundation excavation is complete. The Architect will observe and approval all soil bearing surfaces prior to placement of concrete for mud mat or refill. No concrete shall be placed on bearing surfaces unless approval has been give by the Architect. 7. Foundation bearing surfaces shall be protected by over-excavating below sub-grade and placing a minimum 2000 psi concrete working mat, 3 inches thick. 8. Bottoms of excavation shall be protected from frost. Work shall not be placed on frozen ground nor shall work be placed on wet unstable ground. Do not excavated to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures are expected. 9. Contractor shall assume responsibility for site and subsurface drainage.. Surface water runoff should be diverted away from construction areas so that footings and slabs are not undermined. 10. Excavation carried below the depths indicated and/or specified shall be refilled with compacted gravel as described in Section 02215 FILLING AND BACKFILLING. 02205 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 EXCAVATION: (Continued) 11. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place and grade stockpiles for proper drainage. 12. Typical Sub-Grade Elevations, the minimum elevation of the top of sub-grades shall be 8" under the bottom of walks, 6" under the bottom of drives and parking areas, 6" under the bottom of the slab for interior slabs-on-grade; 8" under the bottom of the slab for exterior pads and slabs-on-grade. The minimum elevation of the top of sub-grade shall be 6" under the bottom of the pipe invert. 13. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 30 degrees F. B. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required sub-grade elevations, notify the Architect who will make an inspection of the conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required sub- grade elevations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and shall not proceed until instructions are given. C. Stabilitv of Excavation: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 1. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. 2. All fill, topsoil, and subsoil should be removed from below the building areas to a limit defined by a 1 horizontal to 1 vertical slope extending downward and outward from the outside edges of the footings to the natural sands. D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding areas. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, lumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components. 02205 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 EXCAVATION: (Continued) 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside the excavation limits for each structure as temporary drainage ditches. 3. Dewatering procedures shall conform with EPA, State or local regulations, the most stringent of which apply. E. Material Stora e: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. F. Excavation for Structure: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/-0.10' and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundation to permit placing and removal of concrete framework, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 1. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. If placing of concrete for footings is not done immediately after excavation, place 2" mud slab for lean concrete to protect footing bottom. G. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations, and grades as shown. 02205 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 EXCAVATION: (Continued) H. Excavation for Utility Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 1. Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth of trenches for piping to establish the indicated floor lines and invert elevations. Beyond the building perimeter keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups. 2. Where rock is encountered, carry the excavation 6" below the required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installing pipe. 3. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe. 4. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below the bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to the level of the bottom of adjacent footing. 5. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by the Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. 6. The underground electrical conduit for site lighting and other electrical improvements which lay under paved areas shall be placed a minimum of 36" below grade. Should the conduit be required to be placed less than 24" below grade due to unsuitable excavation conditions, the Contractor will be required to place 2" of concrete cover for every 6" the conduit is raised. 02205 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Quality Control Testing during Construction, allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. B. Owner may engage a Soils Engineer at his expense to conduct quality control testing during construction. 3.06 CLEANUP: A. Disposal of Material: 1. All excavated materials not approved for backfill and fill, all surplus material boulders and rock resulting shall be removed and legally dispose of, off the project site, in accordance with State and Local codes and regulations. END OF SECTION 02205 02205 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02215 - FILLING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The scope, without limiting the generality thereof, consists of: 1. Furnishing sufficent fill materials to meet required grades. 2. Filling and Backfilling against foundation walls; backfilling for footings, walls, trench walls, piers, concrete equipment bases, and pits. 3. Filling and Backfilling for utility lines, electrical conduit, data, telephone, and fire alarm lines. 4. Grading and filling and compacting as required, to receive new work and areas to be developed for turf areas. 5. Filling to subgrades indicated for all concrete and bituminous concrete pavement. 6. Furnishing and spreading all screened and bank-run gravel fill required under walks, equipment pads, and paved areas. 7. Granular bedding for piping in trenches. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these Specifications: 1. Procedures and Performances Section 01205 2. Temporary Facilities Section 01505 3. Excavation Section 02205 4. Paving Section 02500 5. Cast-In-Place Concrete On Drawings 6. Fire Protection Utilities Services Division 15300 7. Plumbing Utilities Services Division 15400 8. Electrical/Telephone Services Division 16000 02215 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Filling and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with applicable requirements of Standard Specifications, Department of Public Works - Commonwealth of Massachusetts. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handling Materials: The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the public roads, private and public properties clear of all spillage from trucks hauling earthwork materials either from or to the project site. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Existing Utilities: 1. Existing utility lines and underground structures that are shown on the Contract Drawings or the locations of which have been made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained, as well as work constructed during filling and backfilling operations, shall be protected from damage. Any damage to lines or structures which occurs during the Contractor's operations shall be immediately repaired in a manner satisfactory to the local authority and/or private utility concerned, the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor. 2. The finished subgrade shall not be disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be maintained by the Contractor in a satisfactory condition until the finish courses are placed. Until the subgrade has been checked for compliance therewith and approved, by the Contractor, no finish course material shall be installed thereon. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Fill and Backfill: 1. Excavated Materials: The excavated material may be reused as a controlled fill to support the proposed construction provided it is free of organic material and debris and meets the required gradation requirements for specific use intended. 02215 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MATERIALS: (Continued) 2. Granular Fill: materials to be placed where specifications or drawings call for "Fill", "Backfilling", or "Rough Grading" shall be a natural soil, well-graded and non-frozen materials, containing no stones larger than 4" in maximum dimension, and conform to the following gradation requirements: U.S. Standard Sieve % Finer _by Weight 4"* 100 1/2" --- #4 --- #10 30-95 #40 10-70 #100 --- #200 0-8 * Fours inches (4") where placed as a base course below slabs and pavements; elsewhere, two-thirds (2/3) of the loose lift thickness. 3. Sand-Gravel Fill: shall be clean, sandy gravel or gravelly sand, free or organic material, loam, trash, ice, snow, frozen soil, and otherwise objectionable material, and conform to the following gradation requirements: U.S. Standard Sieve % Finer by Weight 4"* 100 1/2" 50-85 #4 40-75 #10 30-60 #40 10-35 #100 5-20** #200 0-8 * Four inches (4") where placed as a base course below slabs and pavements; elsewhere, two-thirds (2/3) of the loose lift thickness. ** The amount passing the No. 100 sieve should be between forty percent (40%) and seventy (70%) of that amount passing the No. 40 sieve. 02215 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 4. Gravel under under walks, equipment pads, and paved surfaces: shall be natural or artificially graded mixture of natural bank-run or crushed gravel, conforming to Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges". 5. Contractor shall notify the Architect of the source of the fill material, prior to delivery of such material to the site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance by Architect of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording location of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place, if required. 5. Removal of trash debris and all other unsuitable material within the areas upon which fill is to be placed. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. B. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 02215 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread an allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to as satisfactory value. C. If the naturally deposited sands become disturbed during construction, surface compact the material with vibratory equipment. D. Protect existing foundations from being undermined during excavation for new foundations. 3.02 FILLS AND BACKFILLING: A. Fills shall be constructed as required at the locations and to the lines and grades indicated and as directed. The completed fill shall correspond to the shapes shown or meet the requirements of the particular case. 1. Slabs-on-grade may be supported on the natural sands or compacted "Gradular Fill", provided a minimum 6" thick layer of compacted "Sand-Gravel Fill" is placed as a base course. Alternatively, the slabs-on-grade may be supported on existing fills, deep densifed in- place, provided the above-specified base course is used and compaction is monitored with field density testing. a. Deep densification of fill may be accomplished with a sufficient number of passes with a vibratory roller having a dynamic force of at least 10,000 pounds to compact the fill such that the "Sand-Gravel Fill" base course is compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557 (Modified Proctor test) and the compacted "Gradular Fill" below the slab and above the footing levels is compacted to at least 92% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density. b. Placement of "Gradular Fill" below structures should extend downward and outward on a 1 horizontal to 1 vertical slope from the footing edge and should be placed in horizontal lifts and compacted using vibratory equipment to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557 (Modified Proctor test). 2. Unless otherwise specified, fills shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of 8" inches in loose depth and compacted as hereinafter specified for the full width of the cross section. 02215 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 FILLING AND BACKFILLING: (Continued) B. Backfilling shall not proceed until construction below finish grade has been approved, forms removed and excavation cleaned of all trash and debris. 1. Except as specified otherwise herein, backfill shall be placed in loose layers not more than 8" thick with each layer compacted thoroughly and evenly; the moisture content of the fill material shall be such that proper compaction will be obtained. Backfll shall be compacted to at least 95% of the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557 (Modified Proctor test). 2. Do not place on frozen ground or during freezing weather. 3. When freezing weather is projected, a layer of fill shall not be left in uncompacted state at the close of a day's operations. The Contractor shall not place a layer of compacted fill on compaction. These unsatisfactory materials shall be removed prior to fill placement. C. Finished Excavation and Fills: All areas excavated and filled shall be uniformly and smoothly graded. The finished surface shall be reasonably smooth, compacted and free from substantial irregularities. The finished surface shall be not more than 0.15 feet above or below established grade. The surface of areas to be paved shall not vary more than 0.05 feet from the established grade. D. Preparation of Sub rg ade for Paved Areas: After the subgrade has been shaped to line and grade, it shall be rolled with a power roller or other suitable methods until thoroughly compacted. This operation shall include any reshaping and wetting required along with the rolling of the subgrade to obtain proper compaction. The Architect may waive rolling, as necessary to avoid disturbance to natural soils. 1. All soft or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials from excavation or borrow, as approved. 02215 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 FILLING AND BACKFILLING: (Continued) 2. All resulting low sections, holes or depressions shall be brought to the required grade with material, as approved, and the entire subgrade shall be shaped to line and grade thoroughly compacted as herein provided. 3. The top 6" of the subgrade shall in every area be compacted at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. E. Installation of Subbase Course at Paved Areas: Subbase course consists of placing minimum 6" subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course beneath the bottom of walks, drives, and parking areas. See Section 02500 PAVING AND SURFACING for paving specification. 1. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of subbase course. 2. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12 foot width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase course. 3. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section of thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content of compacting subbase material during placement operations. a. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 3" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. 4. Compaction: Field compaction of gravel fill under paved areas shall be at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. Field compaction of gravel fill under concrete pavers shall be at least 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. 02215 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 FILLING AND BACKFILLING: (Continued) F. Installation of Subbase Course under EILlity Lines: 1. The filling and backfilling within the area of the utility work shall be carried to the lines and levels required for the grades shown on the Drawings and as specified. On-site material shall meet gradation requirements. Backfilling sahll be be started until conditions have been inspected and approved by the Architect, nor any fill placed until structural members involved have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure to be imposed. 2. Fill material shall be placed in the dry horizontal layers and approval of each layer shall be obtained from the Architect before proceeding to the next. Each layer shall be compacted to 90% of maximum dry density and at a water content equal to optimum water content plus-or-minus two percent. The maximum dry density and optimum water content shall be determined in accordance with eht Standard Method of Test D- 1557, Method D of the American Society of Testing and materials. In place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method Test D-1556. 3. Fill material to be used under all utilities from existing grandular material to 12" above utilities shall be placed in 8" layers. 4. Fill material from 12" above utilities to the sub-grade level under lawns shall be dry gradular material free of loam, clay, ice, snow or other deleterous material, containing no rocks over 6" and compacted in 9" layers to 95% compaction. 5. Backfill trenches only after pipe has been inspected, tested and locations of pipes and appurenances have been recorded. Backfill around pipe by hand and for a depth of 1 foot above pipe and tamp firmly in layers not exceeding 6" in thickness, taking care not to disturb the pipe. Compact the remainder of the backfill in maximum 9" layers to 95% compaction. 3.03 GRADING: A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. 02215 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 GRADING: (Continued) B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, are as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within but not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross- section, with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Bu_ ilding Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straight-edge. D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.04 MAINTENANCE: A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 1. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.05 CLEANING: A. Disposal of Materials: All excess excavated materials shall be removed and disposed of legally off the project site as approved by the State and Local Authorities. END OF SECTION 02215 02215 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02500 - BITUMINOUS PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section wheather or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under this Section.. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, which includes, but is not restricted to, the following: 1. Bituminous Concrete Paving. 2. Work includes patching and paving of existing areas of driveway immediately adjacent to the existing senior center and the proposed addition where underground utilities have been removed, relocated, and/or installed. Underground utilities include sanitary and storm piping, gas piping, and electrical utility and site lighting conduits. 3. Work shall include removal of existing bituminous paving and repaving the service and parking area located between the proposed addition and Saunders Street property line. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work: The following work is not included in this Section and is to be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Preparation of Subgrade; Placement of Gravel Base: Section 02200 - Earthwork. 02500 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Applicable specifications and publications, referred to herein, form a part of these Specifications: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Public Works Standard Specifications Highways and Bridges, latest edition and Town of North Andover regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Bituminous concrete shall be an approved hot plant mix composed of: 1. Asphalt cement 85-100 penetration grade. 2. Aggregate: a. Roadway and Parking Areas: Top course shall be grading "C", 1" thick. Binder course shall be grading "B", 1-1/2" thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Construct bituminous concrete paving for roads and parking areas according to the requirements of drawings. 1. Edge of pavement: Clean and true. Ravelled adges not accepted. Hand-tamp edges and bevel if forms or screed strips are not used. 2. Thickness Tests: After construction, the Architect will designate locations for removal of pavement cores to determine thickness. Remove and replace areas showing deficiencies in required thickness with new material properly laid. END OF SECTION 2500 02500 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02515 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Included: Perform all work necessary and required for the completion of the Projects indicated. Such work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Wood Fencing. 2. Acoustical Metal Barrier at Kitchen Area Roof. B. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Excavation Section 02205 2. Filling, Backfilling, and Grading Section 02215 3. Site Utilities Section 02720 4. Paving Section 02500 5. Concrete On Drawings 6. Painting Section 09900 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit Shop Drawings to the Architect for approval. Show details, dimensions, locations and installation methods of all work under this section. B. Do not commence fabrication or installation until approval has been obtained. 02515 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Conditions regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantee for work under this section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabiliteis which the manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Wood Fencing at Outdoor Deck: Field assembled four (4) foot high wide picket wood fencing shall be manufactured by Expect Fence Corporation, Reliable Fence Company of Cape Cod, or approved equal. 1. General: Posts shall be 4" x 4" smooth S4S, north white cedar with "Falmouth" post cap spaced 6'-0" o.c.. Picket boards shall be 7/8" x 3-1/2" boards with 3" space between pickets. B. Acoustical Metal Panels: Insulated metal wall panels and supports shall be self-contained, factory assemble interlocking panels, 12" wide x 3" thick overall as manufactured by Architectural Products, Pontiac, Michigan, Walcon Corporation, Southfield, Michigan, or approved equal. 1. Construction: Units shall be a 22 gauge, galvanized steel, ribbed profile design. Finish shall be fluropolymer, Kynard "500" coating over baked enamel epoxy primer. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Acoustical insulation contained between the inner and outer sheets of the panels shall be non- combustible glass fiber material with an expanded polyethylene or wir mesh spacer installed across the width of the perforated strip to uniformly isolate the vapor barrier and insulation from the metal surface and a plastic film, shop-fastened to the caulked liner to control passage of water vapor. The system shall obtain a noise reduction coefficient of .92 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423-66. 2. Furnish all miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, and corner pieces. 02515 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WOOD FENCING: A. Excavate a mimimum of 3'-0" below grade for fencing. Prepare and treat fence supports as required for installation below grade. B. After installation of fencing posts, backfill excavated area. 3.02 ACOUSTICAL METAL PANELS: A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Installation shall be performed in conjunction with the membrane roofing installation and flashing of support members shall be done in accordance with the membrane roofmg manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION 02515 02515 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 02720 - SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work Included: Perform all work necessary and required for the completion of the Project, as indicated. Such work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Catch basins, drain manholes. 2. Sanitary sewer manholes. 3. Hydrant relocation. 4. Drain line piping. 5. Sewer line piping. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Excavation Section 02205 2. Filling and Backfilling Section 02215 3. Concrete On Drawings 4. Plumbing Division 15400 5. Site Improvements Section 02515 02720 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer: A firm specializing and experienced in site utility and storm sewer system work for not less than five (5) years. B. Refer to applicable Sections 02205 and 02215 for excavation and backfilling work related to storm sewer systems. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) C. Refer to applicable Section 03300 for concrete work related to storm sewer systems. D. Refer to applicable Division 15000 Sections for roof drain connections, piping systems and related work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Storm Sewer System: Submit shop drawings for the system, showing conduit sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes for horizontal locations, elevations, and slopes for horizontal runs. Include details of underground structures, metal accessories, fittings, and connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT MATERIALS: A. General: Furnish bells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, increasers, crosses, transitions, and end caps of the same type and class of material as the conduit, or of material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as acceptable to the Architect. B. Piping: shall be asbestos cement conforming to Type I, Class 3300, ASTM C-644. Joints shall be flexible, resilient material conforming to ASTM C- 425. C. Drain lines: 12" in diameter and over shall be reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C -76 Class 4 Wall B. Pipes shall be tongue and groove or bell and spigot. 02720 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS: A. Materials: All materials shall conform to the requirements hereinafter specified and/or the requirements of the latest edition of the standard specifications referred to herein. 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Circular reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM C-76, Class V as shown on the drawings. a. Joints in the pipe shall be of ton e-and- roove tyke incorporating a single rubber ag_sket, in which the gasket is in compression and which will permit both longitudinal and angular movement without leakage. The end of each length of pipe shall be made true to form and dimensions. b. The gasket shall be of tough, flexible, chemical-resistant rubber conforming to the latest ASTM Standard C-443. In addition, the joint shall be thoroughly filled internally and externally with a mortar mix using "Embeco," "Interplast", or "Sika", or approved equal. Lifting holes shall be stoppered with a tight rubber plus and covered with mortar mix as specified herein. 2. Cast-Iron Frame and Covers: Cast-Iron frames and covers shall be as manufactured by the E.L. LeBaron Foundry Co., Brockton, Massachusetts or approved equal a. Casting shall be of tough, gray cast iron and shall be true to pattern, out of wind and free from flaws. The bearing surfaces of manhole frames and covers against each other shall be machined to give continuous contact throughout their entire circumference. All iron casting shall be thoroughly cleaned and then coated with hot coal tar before begin delivered. b. Sizes and styles of castings shall conform to the latest standard of the local authorities highway department. 3. Manholes and Catch Basins: Manholes and Catch Basins shall be pro- gray concrete or cement block masonry in accordance with the latest standard of local authorities highway department. All cement block masonry to be 8" block. 02720 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS: (Continued) 4. The inverts of all manholes shall be lined with dense, hard-burned brick: Valves shall be faced with hard-burned brick. Brick shall conform to ASTM C-32. All exterior surfaces of manholes constructed of block masonry shall be plastered with cement mortar, the plaster being carried up as the masonry progresses. Manholes step shall be of extruded aluminum. 2.03 MASONRY MATERIALS: A. Mortar one part Portland Cement conforming to ASTM Specification C-140- 71, Type II, and two (2) parts sand. 2.04 METAL ACCESSORIES: A. Cast-Iron Frames and Grates: Gary iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASHO Design M-150-62, latest amendment. Finished castings shall be painted with a bituminuous material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which storm sewer system work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 GENERAL: A. Under no circumstances place concrete, lay piping, or install appurtenances in excavations containing free water, or on frozen subgrade. 02720 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: (Continued) G. Install masonry reinforcement, anchors, and ties as follows: 1. Joint Reinforcement: a. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6". Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. Space reinforcing at 16" on center vertically. 2. Masonry to Wood Stud Backup Wall Ties: a. Space maximum 16" on center horizontally and vertically. 3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: A. Uy brick units with completely filled bed, had and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Joints Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jabs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 04200 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: (Continued) C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in a running bond pattern aligning new brick and CMU courses with existing brick and CMU courses. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a width bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each width at corners, unless otherwise shown. D. Lay-up Walls: plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built-In Work: As the work progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 2. Install precast concrete units as indicated on drawings. 3. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 4. Fill CMU Cores with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. 04200 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES: A. Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed to size as shown on the drawings and specified hereinafter. B. Precast concrete Manholes and Catch Basins: 1. Place precast concrete sections as shown on the drawings. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface. 2. Use epoxy bonding compound where manhole steps are mortared into manhole walls. 3. Manhole and catch basins risers and tops shall be installed using approved "ring" type neoprene gaskets. 4. Apply bituminuous mastic coating at joints of sections. 5. Cast-iron manhole frames with covers or grates shall be well bedded in cement mortar. 6. Set cast iron or structural steel frames and gratings to be elevations indicated. 3.04 LAYING PIPE: A. Pipe shall be laid upon a trench bottom as specified by the Contract Drawings. All pipe shall be carefully cleaned just before laying. Extreme care shall be exercised so as not to damage the pipe in handling. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and so laid as to form a tight joint with the next adjoining pipe and to bring the inverts continuous. B. No walking on or working over the pipes after they are laid, except as may be necessary in making joints, in placing cradles, and in tamping the backfill material, will be permitted until the pipes are covered with earth to a depth of 12 inches. During construction, all openings to the pipe lines shall be protected from the entrance of earth of other material. Where new pipes are to joining existing ones, the Contractor shall do such work as necessary to make the connections. Completed sections may be used in the control of water plan, however, any foreign materials that enter the system must be removed and completed work must be protected from water during the curing period. 02720 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 LAYING PIPE: (Continued) C. Pipe shall be laid true to line and grade with the bells upgrade. Sections of the pipe shall be laid and jointed so as to maintain a true, uniform invert. Each section of the pipe shall be inspected for defects before being lowered into the trench. Bell holes shall be excavated to provide continuous, uniform support for the full length of pipe. The lifting hole shall be on line and vertical. Manufacturer's markings shall be visible until inspected and accepted. D. The concrete mixture shall contain at least 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete mixture, as measured before being placed in the form,s and an aggregate that has been washed and well-graded. The concrete shall develop a strength of at least 4,500 psi at 28 days. The portland cement shall be made in the United States of America and shall be moderate-heat-of- hardening portland cement conforming of ASTM C-150, Type II. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports by means of which the cement can be identified, and certifying that materials and manufacture meet requirements for the class pipe specified. Each section of pipe shall be clearly marked to identify the class, and date manufactured. E. Promptly after the pipe has been cast, it shall be stored in suitable curing room; and as soon as the initial set of the concrete has take place, it shall be subject to a line spray of hot water or to the action of thoroughly saturated steam. Curing shall proceed for a period of time sufficient to enable the pipe to meet ultimately the strength and absorption requirements. No pipe shall be delivered to the site of work until the pipe is seven days old. F. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of strength and absorption tests, and by inspection at the point of delivery to the project to determine whether the pipe conforms to the specifications in design and free from defects. Pipe shall be subject to rejection at the point of delivery on account of failure to meet any of the specification requirements or on account of any of the following: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except that a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint shall not be cause for rejection. If a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint exists in more than 10% of the pipe inspected, however, the defective pipe shall be rejected. 2. Defects which indicated imperfect mixing and molding. 02720 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 LAYING PIPE: (Continued) 3. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 4. Spalls deeper than one-half the depth of the joint or extending more than 4 inches around the circumference. If spalls not deeper than one- half the depth of the joint or extending not more than 4 inches around the circumference exist in more than 10% of the pipe, however, the defective pipe shall be rejected. 5. Exposure of the reinforcement when such exposure would indicated that the reinforcement is misplaced. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT: A. General: 1. Install conduit in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. Inspect conduit before installation to detect any apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from the site. 3. Lay conduit beginning at the low point of a system, true to the grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. 4. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacture's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. 5. Cleaning Conduit: a. Clear the interior of conduit of dirt and other superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain a swab or drag in the line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. b. In large, accessible conduit, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. C. Place plugs in the ends of uncompleted conduit at the end of the day or whenever work stops. 02720 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT: (Continued) d. Flush lines between manholes, if required, to remove collected debris. 6. Joint Adaptors: Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast-iron adaptors and fittings. 7. Roof Drain Connections: Connect roof drains at storm drain at manholes or as indicated. Pipe stubs and roof drain connections shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 15000. B. Interior Inspections: Inspect conduit to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1. Make inspections after lines between manholes or manhole locations have been installed and approximately two (2) feet of backfill is in place, and at completion of the project. 2. If the inspection indicated poor alignment, debris, displace pipe, infiltration, or other defects, take whatever steps are necessary to correct such defects to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.06 BACKFILLING: A. General: Furnishing and placing of ill, crushed stone, and backfill is included in the Scope of the Work in Section 02215. 3.07 TESTING: A. Perform testing of completed conduit lines in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. B. The rate of infiltration into or leakage out of all gravity drawings and appurtenant constructions shall be tested. Suitable bulkheads, weirs or other devices shall be built by the contractor to enable the Engineer to make measurements of the water-tightness of the drains after their completion. 02720 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.07 TESTING: (Continued) C. Tests for infiltration into gravity drains and appurtenances shall be made when the ground water level is above the crown of the drain. Tests for leakage out of gravity drains and appurtenances shall be made when the groundwater level is below the crown of the drain. Leakage sets out of drains shall be made by filling the drain and manholes in the section being tested with water to a level not more than 6 feet above the centerline of the main drain pipe at the lowest point in that section. Infiltration into gravity drains shall be made by building temporary bulkheads at both ends of the section under tests and allowing the groundwater to leak into the drain. The Contractor shall remove all bulkheads and weirs after the conclusion of tests when ordered by the Engineer. D. Whenever drains cannot be tested by water because of steep slopes, or for other reasons acceptable to the Engineer, low-pressure air tests shall be used to test the gravity drains. Leakage shall be measured in terms of time for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge. Allowable time for difference sizes of pipe shall be in accordance with current accepted standards. E. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for securing the water for test purposes and shall stand the expense of these arrangements and of the water required for leakage tests. 3.08 ALIGNMENT AND CLEANING: A. All pipe shall be inspected by the Engineer for proper alignment. Misaligned pipe shall be corrected by the Contractor. All parts of the storm drainage system affected by work under this contract shall be cleaned of all earth and debris upon the completion of the drainage work. END OF SECTION 02720 02720 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted of the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of Massachusetts General Laws C. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered Al through A9 inclusive. E. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes touse to perform the following classes of work on part therof and the bid price therefor. CLASS OF WORK REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS None Required F. In any case in which the Sub-bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the class of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB- BID, but not his bid price. 04200 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule, and generally includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of new brick masonry. 2. Cutting and patching of existing brick masonry. 3. Installation of concrete masonry units. 4 Cutting and patching of existing concrete masonry units. 5. Masonry cleaning. 6. Furnishing and installing masonry flashing and accessories. 7. Staging and scaffolding. 8. Concrete fill in hollow metal frames. 9. Removal of existing brick masonry/concrete masonry units. 10. Furnishing and installing new steel lintels in new and existing masonry. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. The following materials furnished under other sections shall be installed under this section. 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Access panels. 3. Anchor bolts, inserts, Hailers, blocking, and similar fastenings. 4. Hollow metal frames in masonry. 5. Reinforcing bars in concrete block walls. D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Loose lintels, anchors, bolts and similar work. Section 05500 2. Painting. Section 09900 3. Concrete Work. On Drawings 4. Roofing System. Section 07530 5. Caulking and Sealants. Section 07900 1.03 UO ALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with the requirements for materials and installation established by the BIA, NCMA, ANSI and ASTM Requirements, and other governing authorities for the construction shown. 04200 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Field Constructed Mock-ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall representative of completed masonry work required for project with respect to qualities of appearance, materials, and construction. Locate mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. For the following types of masonry, build mock-ups which are approximately 4' long by 4' high by full thickness including backup widths, if any. When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit facing brick and split-faced concrete masonry unit samples and mortar and grout colors as required to match existing masonry conditions. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. B. Protect sills, ledges, and window frames and glass, and projections from droppings of mortar. C. Protect masonry against freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air if 40 degrees F. and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work. Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction: of the Technical Notes of Brick and Tile Construction by the Brick Institute of America (BIA) and National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)." 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE: A. Delivery: Delivery materials to site in original manufacturer's containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. B. Handling: Unload and handle all materials carefully so as to prevent chipping and breakage. Use pallets at time of unloading, storage and transporting to point of installation. Masonry materials damaged in any manner will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Purchaser. 04200 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE: (Continued) C. Stora e: Storage piles, stacks, or bins shall be located to avoid or be protected from heavy and unnecessary f lc Materials ved roof at all times with waterproof tarpaulin or stored under an approved except when men are working and using the materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 MAS____�_N_RY UNITS: A. GENERAL: 1. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry h kind required, for each continuous units from one uniform texture and color for area and visually related areas. 2. M&Lonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. B. BRICK: 1. Size: Unless otherwise indicated, provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions: a. Standard: 2-1/4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8". 2. Facin Brick: ASTM C 216, and as follows: a. Texture and Color Brick Tyne "A": Provide a brick which matches as closely as possible the existing building brick. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to order an adequate quantity of brick to complete the entire project. For reference purposes, brick identified as "Pink Belgian" manufactured by S&H and distributed by Spaulding Brick Inc. closely matches the existing building brick, however, it is not the intent of this specification to define or limit the Contractor from submitting other brick which may also match the existing building brick. b. Texture and Color Brick Tyne "B": It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to order an adequate quantity of brick to complete the entire project. For reference purposes, brick identified as "Manganese Ironspot" manufactured by Endicott Clay Products and distributed by Spaulding Brick Inc. 04200 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MASONRY UNITS: (Continued) C. Efflorescent Testing: When tested by the "Wick Test" in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C67, brick shall not be rated more than "slightly effloresced" after seven days partial immersion in distilled water. aa. 2500 psi minimum compressive strength bb. 20% maximum water absorption (5 hr period submersion in boiling water) CC. .80 maximum saturation coefficient d. Grade: SW, Type FBA (normal size and color variations). e. Existing Face Brick: This trade shall remove the existing face brick at the building as required. The brick to be removed shall be removed with utmost care to preserve the portions of walls to remain. C. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS C( MU): 1. Size: Manufacturer's standard split-faced concrete masonry units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), and containing a single "false" joint. Thickness as required on drawings. 2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bond beams and other special conditions. 3. Texture and Color: Provide a two-rib split-faced concrete masonry unit which matches as closely as possible the existing building concrete masonry units. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to order an adequate quantity of brick to complete the entire project. The existing color is "Taupe". For reference purposes, split-faced concrete masonry unit identified as "L-2" manufactured by Anchor Concrete Products, Inc. and distributed by Spaulding Brick Inc. closely matches the existing building split-faced concrete masonry units, however, it is not the intent of this specification to define or limit the Contractor from submitting other split-faced concrete masonry units which may also match the existing building split-faced concrete masonry units. 4. Existing Split-Faced CMU: This trade shall remove the existing split- faced concrete masonry units at the building as required. The CMU to be removed shall be removed with utmost care to preserve the portions of walls to remain. 04200 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES: (Continued) 4. Structural Reinforcement: Grade 60 minimum yield strength 60,000 psi. (non-galvanized) C. Compressible Filler: 1. Provide compressible filler where new work abutts existing masonry and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings. Filler shall be preformed closed-cell foam polyethylene, sponge rubber or fiber expansion joint filler of proper thickness to be under compression. Hold filler back 1/2" from exposed face of partition for caulking by others. Filler shall be "Homex" as manufactured by Homasote; "Poly-tite" as manufactured by Sandell or approved equal. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES: A. Do not lower the freezing piLuit of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, use type M mortar. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except build single-width walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. Build chases and recesses as shown and/or as required for the work of other trades. B. Cut masonry units: with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. 04200 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III, may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce the required mortar color. Mortar color is intended to match existing "white" mortar color at the brick areas and "taupe" mortar color at all split-faced concrete masonry units (including any false joint fillers). B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Agg_re agates: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. Aggregate color shall be that necessary to match existing mortar color. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean, non-alkaline, potable and free from salts or other injurious elements. 2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES: A. Flashings for Masonry: 1. Provide full sheet of wiring polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers, formed into uniform flexible sheets not less than 20 mils thick and black in color. Thru-wall flashing shall be furnished and installed by the Mason Subcontractor. B. Masonry Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties: 1. All material except as otherwise specified herein shall be zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM specification A153. Class B-1, or B-2, or B-3, as required. 2. Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type, one and one-half inches less than the thickness of the wall, shop fabricated with 9 gauge cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82, as manufactured by A.A. Wire Products Company, or Dur-O-Wal. 3. Masonry to wood stud backup walls: 16 ga. hot dipped galvanized wall ties 7" long 7/8" wide corrugated wall tie equal to #260 as manufactured by Heckmann Building Products. 04200 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: (Continued) E. Grouting Concrete Masonry Units: Follow NCMA guidelines for low-lift grouting or high-lift grouting if cleanouts are used. 3.03 LINTELS: A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. 3.04 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown or no greater than 30'-0" O.C. Build-in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. 3.05 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK: A. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divers such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and fee from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. 1. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in from exterior face of outer width of masonry, through the outer width, turned up a minimum of 4" and through the inner width, to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner width is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner width and turn up approximately 2". 3.06 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING: A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform, appearance, properly prepared for application for caulking or sealant compounds. 04200 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.06 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING: (Continued) C. Clean exposed brick masonry surfaces by the bucket and brush hand cleaning methods or by high pressure water methods. 1. Use commercial cleaning agents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. END OF SECTION 04200 04200 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS: PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Types: Of work in this section generally includes but is not limited to metal fabrications for: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 3. Rough Hardware. 3. Steel railings and handrails. 4. Ladders 5. Cast Treads. D. It is not intended that all items of light iron and miscellaneous metal work required for the building be described herein. Contractor shall provide all light iron and miscellaneous metal not specified elsewhere, which is shown on or implied by the drawings and required for the work, whether described herein or not. 05500 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts E. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Installation of items built into concrete work, Section 03300 2. Installation of items built into masonry work, Section 04200. 3. Field Painting, Section 09900. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Sion Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Submittals: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications. include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metals: 1. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 3. Steel Bar Gratin: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36. 4. Steel Pine: ASTM A 53. 5. Brackets, Flames, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 05500 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MATERIALS: (Continued) 6. Concrete Inserts: threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 153. B. Grout: 1. Metallic Non-Shrink Grout: Non-aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-0588, Type M. 2. Non-Shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-0588. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. C. Fasteners: 1. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 2. Bolts, and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 3. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 4. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 5. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 6. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-2-92. 7. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 9. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 05500 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MATERIALS: (Continued) D. Paint: 1. Metal Primer Paint: Red lead mixed pigment, alkyd varnish, linseed oil paint, FS-TT-P-86, Type II; or red lead iron oxide, raw linseed oil, alkyd paint, Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint 2-64; or basic lead silicon chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil, alkyd paint, FS TT-P-615, Type II. 2. Primer: selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish requirements specified in Division 9. 3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re- galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying the Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships). 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finish product for use intended. Use proven details of fabrication and support. 2. Form exposed work true to lien and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 3. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 4. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal work as required to receive fire shutter. 05500 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: (Continued) B. Galvanizing: 1. Provide a zinc coating for those items exposed to moisture or specified to be galvanized, as follows: a. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. b. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier. C. ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. 2. Provide a zinc "colorized" coating for exterior stair railings. 3. Fabricateioints which will be exposed to either in am manner to exlude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. C. Shop Painting: 1. Shop Paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mills scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning". 3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges and exposed surfaces. 5. ARply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. 05500 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS: A. Rough Hardware: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts,plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring and securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Section. 2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. B. Loose Steel Lintels: 1. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Si Worts: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Provide miscellaneous steel fry and supports for fire shutters and movable partitions. 3. Furnish and install galvanized steel angle lintels for brick support over windows and other openings. 4. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, or required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, or welded constructions using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 05500 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS: (Continued) D. Steel Pipe Railing and Handrails: 1. Fabricate steel pipe railings and handrails to design, dimensions, and details indicated, but in no case less than 6" space between horizontal members and 4'-0" between posts. Provide rails and handrails members formed of pipe of minimum 1 1/2" diameter and wall thickness indicated, or if not shown, as required to support design loading. 2. Interconnect railing and hand rail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors. 3. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. 4. Provide wall returns at end of wall-mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated. 5. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. 6. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, and closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. a. For railing posts set in concrete: Provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6" long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and length not less than 1" greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 7. Color-galvanize exterior steel railing, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous components. 05500 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS: (Continued) E. Ladders: 1. Fabricate roof access ladders for the location shown, with dimensions, spacing, details and anchorages as indicated. a. Unless otherwise shown, provide 1/2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges, space 18" apart. b. Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel Barr rungs, spaced 12" o.c. 2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind a smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-0" o.c. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handhold are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. 4. Provide non-slip surface on the top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. F. Cast Treads 1. Provide cast iron units with integral abrasive finish at all exterior concrete tread stairs. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions. a. Cast units with an integral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicone carbine, or a combination of both. 2. Provide concealed anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. 3. Apply black ashaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast iron units set into concrete. 05500 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Fastening to In-place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 2. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in framework for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smoothhand touch-up shop paint coat. Dot not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for Procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 05500 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: (Continued) B. Steel Pipe Railings and Handrails: 1. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends in building construction as follows. a. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted in to sleeves, fill granular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. b. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout and leave 1/8" built-up, sloped away from post. For installation exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 2. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction using concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. E. Cast Treads: Install cast treads and thresholds with anchorage systems shown to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Seal units exposed to exterior in mastic to provide a watertight installation. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 2 coats of galvanizing repair paint. END OF SECTION 05500 05500 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all the rough carpentry work as shown and noted on the drawings and specified herein, including wood studs, sheathing, soles, grounds, cants, curbs, blockings, rough frames, sills, nailing strips, strapping, miscellaneous framing members, and roof decking. 2. Wood blocking between studs for securing cabinets and other wall hung items, including, but not limited to Owner's equipment, electrical lighting fixtures requiring additional support. 3. Backboards for Electrical, Telephone, Fire Alarm panels and other miscellaneous panels. 4. Unless otherwise specified, rough hardware such as nails, screws, clips and other devices required for securing item of rough carpentry shall be furnished and installed under this section. 06100 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) 5. All carpenter's work and materials not specified elsewhere, but which are implied by the Drawings and/or required for the work, shall be furnished under this Section, whether or not specifically described herein. 6. Wood preservative treatment. 7. Prefabricated Trusses. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Section of these Specification: 1. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 2. Hollow Metal Doors Section 08100 3. Builders Hardware Section 08700 3. Drywall Section 09250 4. Painting Section 09900 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The grades of all material under this Section shall be as defined by the rules of recognized association of lumber manufacturers producing the materials specified. Materials for millwork shall meet the minimum standards called for on the materials schedule, but must also conform to or exceed the requirements of CUSTOM GRADE Quality Standards as established by the Architectural Woodwork Institute. Where conflicts occur between AWI Standards and this Specification, the more stringent requirements shall govern in each case. B. Lumber and plywood shall bear the grade and trademark of the association under whose rules it is produced, and a marker of mill identification. C. Lumber and finished woodwork throughout shall be of sound stock, thoroughly seasoned, kiln-dried to a moisture content not exceeding 19% for framing and 12% for finish. 06100 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) D. Work that is to be finished or painted shall be free from defects or blemishes on all surfaces exposed to view. All material which is in any way defective and not up to specifications for quality and grade, or otherwise not in proper condition, shall be rejected. Rough lumber shall be dressed four (4) sides, air-dried, well seasoned, sound, and free from splits, cracks, and wanes, loose or unsound unknots, and decay. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Prefabricated Truss Shop Drawings: Engineering drawings conforming with the design load and deflection criteria contained on the Contract Drawings shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. Fabricator shall certify and be responsible for the load carrying capacity of the trusses. The Shop Drawings with engineering calculations shall be prepared by the Fabricator and stamped by a registered structural engineer. 1.04 REFERENCES: A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated. 1.05 INTENT: A. It is not the intent of this Specification to define the types, sizes, or installation methods for each item of finish or trim. Installation, joinery, sizes, types of finish, spacings of nailers and furring strips, shall be done in accordance with the details on the drawings for the specific areas involved in accordance with the listed standards as approved by the Architect. 06100 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 INTENT: (Continued) B. All carpenter's work and materials not specified elsewhere, but which are necessary to complete the work, shall be furnished under this section, whether or not specifically described herein. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protect all work against damage during construction. Provide and lay all building paper required for protection of finish floors. B. Measurements Take all required measurements at building and be responsible for their accuracy. 1.07 TEMPORARY WORK: A. Do all Contractor's work required by the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, and SECTION 01505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES and not otherwise specified, including, but not limited to, the following: B. Scaffolding: Furnish, install, and maintain for the use of all trades, all scaffolding, staging, and planking except as otherwise stipulated. C. Entrances: At all openings into the construction area which are not otherwise closed, provide temporary wood batten doors complete with necessary plank frames, and padlocks; maintain same in operating condition, and remove from the premises when permanent enclosures are installed. D. Excavated Areas: At all excavated areas for foundations, provide temporary wood cover over open areas to protect personnel from injuries during unsupervised hours; maintain coverage until excavated areas have been filled in, and remove from the premises after excavated areas have been filled in. E. Window Openings: As may be required, provide temporary wood batten windows complete with necessary plank frames. Remove from the premises when permanent windows are installed. 06100 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DeliveKy and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Lumber, General: 1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading, agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish. 2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 3. Framing Lumber: a. For light framing (less than 6" wide), provide "Stud" grade lumber for stud framing and "Standard grade for other light framing, may be Eastern Hemlock, Hem-Fir, or Eastern Spruce #3. b. For Structural Framing (6" and wider and from 2" to 4" thick), provide the following grade and species: Hem-Fir #2 which meets or exceeds the following values:- Fb (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending); 1000 psi. E (minimum modules of elasticity); 1,400,000. 06100 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MATERIALS:(Continued) B. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: a. Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. b. Grade: Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No. 2 boards (SPIB or WWPA). C. Plywood: 1. Identification: Each panel of plywood shall be identified with the appropriate DFPA Grade-Trademark of the American Plywood Association, and shall meet the requirement of the latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS-1-66 for Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial. All plywood which has NUV edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be exterior type. 2. Plod Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 3/4". 3. Wall Sheathing: 1/2" 5 ply construction, APA C-C EXT grade designation. 4. Roof Sheathing (Rated Construction): 5/8" 5 ply construction, APA C- C EXT grade designation at locations requiring fire-resistant rating. 5. Roof Sheathing: 5/8" 5 ply construction, APA C-C EXT grade designation at locations not requiring fire-resistant rating. 06100 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 MATERIALS: (Continued) D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. a. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153). 2. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, 15 lb, non-perforated, ASTM D 226. 3. Air Infiltration Barrier: 6 mil polyethene, "Tyvex" by Dupont, "Barricade" by Simplex Products, or approved equal. 4. Sheathing Tape: "3M Contractor Sheathing Tape No. 8086" for seam sealing at sheathing joints, doors, windows, sill plate area, top plate area, and utility penetrations. 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT: A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on Drawings as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWBP Quality Mark Requirements. 06100 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT:(Continued) 1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-born preservatives comply with AWPB LP -2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15%. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry.or concrete at foundation and slab. b. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar member in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood preservative used in roof blocking shall be of a type approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use with his product. 2. Pressure-treat the following with water-borne preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22. a. Wood members in contact with ground. 3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.03 PREFABRICATED TRUSSES A. Manufacturer: Wood trusses shall be fabricated by a qualified truss fabricator having a minimum of five years experience. B. Design Standards: Design standards shall conform with the applicable provisions of the NATIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR WOOD CONSTRUCTION, published by the National Forest Products Association, and the DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES, published by the Truss Plate Institute. 06100 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 PREFABRICATED TRUSSES: (Continued) C. Connector Plates: All connector plates shall be a minimum thickness of 0.036" and shall be manufactured from steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A446 Grade A, and shall be hot dipped galvanized according to ASTM A525. Coating Designation G60. D. Ouali Control: All wood material used in the construction of the trusses shall be kiln-dried. Lumber defects such as wane or knots occurring in the connector plate area must not affect more than ten percent of the required plate area or the number of effective teeth required for each truss member. Connector plates shall be applied to both faces of the truss at each joint, and should provide firm, even contact between the plate and the wood member. All wood members shall be accurately cut and fabricated so that all members have good bearing and all completed truss units are uniform. Refer to the Truss Plate Institute QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL QCM-77 for tolerences and other special requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set carDentry work accurately to required levels and line,s with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. 3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 06100 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSTALLATION: (Continued) 4. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use hot dip galvanized nails for exposed exterior work. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 5. Provide all necessary wood framing, blocking, roof cants, nailing strips, furring strips, nailing inserts, grounds, centers for masonry, rough door bucks, and usual items of similar nature as required to frame out and to secure and properly install the work of all trades, as indicated. Nailing shall be in accordance with HHFA "Technique of House Nailing", or as otherwise approved by the Architect. B. Installation of Prefabricated Trusses: All trusses must be securely braced both during erection and after permanent installation in the building in accoradance with BRACING WOOD TRUSSES: Commentary and Recommendations (BWT-76) as published by the Truss Plate Institute. Erection bracing shall hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition until decking and permanent truss bracing has been fastened forming a structurally sound roof framing system. C. Fire Resistance Rated Truss Framed Ceiling System: Refer to Section 09250 and drawings for installation requirements of fire resistance rated truss framed ceiling system. 3.02 CLEANUP A. Maintain working area in a safe, orderly, and workmanlike manner at all times when working on building and insure that materials supplied are kept in orderly manner and protected from damage by weather or other causes. END OF SECTION 06100 06100 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is nonstructural and which is not specified as part of other sections. Types of finished carpentry work in this section generally include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Frames and Trim for Windows and Doors 2. Interior Running and Standing Trim 3. Countertops and Cabinets 4. Nails, screws, and fasteners B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. The following items are to be installed under this Section, but are furnished elsewhere: 1. Wood Doors Section 08210 2. Finish Hardware Section 08700 D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 2. Aluminum Windows Section 08520 3. Painting Section 09900 06200 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if its cannot be marked on a concealed surface. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each item of factory-fabricated items. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. C. Samples: Submit samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish carpentry as required by the Architect for his approval. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 06200 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Examination: The installer must examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Installer shall verify all dimensions in field. B. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry installation areas. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. 1.06 INTENT: A. It is not the intent of this Specification to define the types, sizes, or installation methods for each item of finish or trim or the types, sizes, or installation methods for each item of casework. Installation, joinery, sizes, type of finish, spacings of nailers and furring strips, shall be done in accordance with the details on the Drawings for the specific areas involved in accordance with the listed standards as approved by the Architect. B. All carpenter's work and materials not specified elsewhere, but which are implied by the Drawings and/or required for the work, shall be furnished under this Section, whether to nor specifically described herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules for the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1. C. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) rules. D. Hardwood Ply Standard: Comply with PS 51. 06200 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: (Continued) E. Woodworking Standard: The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and, by reference, are hereby made a part of this specification. Any item not give a specific quality grade shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards". F. Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish as indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard products. Manufacturers include Wilson Art, Nevamar, Formica, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. General: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. 3. Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued-up lumber or made of solid lumber stock. a. Wood species: Natural pine, birch or poplar, except where noted otherwise. Paint grade. B. Interior Standing and RunninLy Trim: 2. Wood Species for Painted Finish shall be natural pine, birch or poplar, except where noted otherwise. Select or Choice grade. 06200 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: (Continued) C. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the proper type, size, material and finish for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with Federal Specifications. 2.03 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: A. Plastic Laminate Finished Casework And Countertops: At Contractor's option, premanufactured casework units may be used provided they meet the standards listed below. 1. Laminated Plastic for casework and countertops the laminate plastic shall be standard grade (general purpose) 1/32" thick high pressure malemine laminate. 2. Backing Sheets for casework and counter tops the laminated plastic shall be 1/32" thick high pressure malemine laminate. 3. Colors, textures and finish will be selected from all the manufacturers full range of materials. The Architect reserves the right to vary colors from unit to unit to use more than one color per unit. 4. Plastic Laminate Doors shall have a core of plywood or particleboard of 3/4" thickness minimum banded with pressure-glued hardwood. All surfaces of doors shall be veneered with laminated plastic unless otherwise detailed. 5. Base Cabinets: Cabinet ends shall have a finished inside dimension from front to back of at least 24 inches or as otherwise indicated to permit alignment of adjacent ends and continuously flush recessed toe panels of full variety of types in one grouping. G.C. to coordinate openings for sinks. 6. Recessed Toe Space: Toe space shall be faced with four in. high, ribbed back, top set coved rubber base, furnished and installed elsewhere, matching base of adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Wall Cabinets: Cabinet ends shall have a finished inside dimension from front to back of at least 12 inches or as otherwise indicated. 06200 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:(Continued) 8. Counter Tops and Splash Backs: Laminated plastic counter tops and splash backs shall be of one inch thick core minimum veneered with plastic laminate, with backing sheets where required, self edged unless otherwise indicated. Height of back splash shall be as indicated. All outside countertop corners shall be rounded with minimum 1" radius. 9. Fabricate exposed Oes of plastic laminate casework, including edges of doors and drawers when open, with matching plastic laminate, except as otherwise indicated. 2.04 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS: A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for units which are specified as "Door Hardware" in other sections of these specifications. B. Hardware Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI A 156.9, "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware". C. Hardware: Shall be as manufactured by Knapp and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley Hardware or approved equal. Stanley hardware numbers are given as base for comparison only and not as a preference. 1. Hinges: For 1-1/4" thick core doors, pivot set Stanley #342 with #321 intermediate pivot. For 3/4" thick core doors pivot set Stanley #332 with #335 intermediate pivot. Finish shall be US 3. 2. Catches: Aluminum magnetic type. Provide one magnetic catch for cabinet doors 48 inches high and under and two for doors over 48 inches high. 3. Door Pulls: Shall be bright brass US 3 finish round bar type 4 inches long with 1-5/16 inches projection, secured with machine screws from inside on all plastic laminate cabinets. 4. Drawer Slides: Shall be full extension steel slides (100 lb. load) with nylon ball-bearing rollers. Slides shall have positive stop. Drawers shall be equipped with rubber bumpers and shall close automatically when within 4 1/2 inches of closing. 06200 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS: (Continued) 5. Shelf Standards: For casework shall be bright brass plated steel (Knape & Vogt 255BR) for recessed mounting with screws 5/8 inch wide by 3/16 inch high providing 1.2 inch adjustment, complete with shelf supports. 2.05 PREMANUFACTURED COMPONENTS A. Columns: Ten (10) inch round, plain, tapered, columns constructed of ponderosa pine, sugar pine, or popular, complete with 12" square wood ventilated base and 10" square wood cap. Columns, base, and cap shall be factory primed prior to shipment and ready for finish painting in field after installation. Columns which are to be located outside the building shall be waterproofed on inside. Glue used in assembling compounds shall be water resistant. Columns, bases, and caps shall be manufactured by Somerset Door and Column Company, (Model #100), Somerset, PA., Brosco Manufacturing Company, Andover, MA., Melton Classic, Lawrencevill, GA., or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP: A. All millwork shall be made to details in an approved shop where work may be inspected by Architect before delivery. No finish or materials shall be delivered until building is ready for their installation. All finish carpentry items shall be as indicated, specified, or scheduled, completely installed, as approved by the Architect. Provide for attachment of work of other trades as indicated or required. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND CABINETS/COUNTERTOPS: A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. 06200 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND CABINETS/COUNTERTOPS: (Continued) B. Install the work 1p umb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Door and Window Trim: Install using full-length pieces. Cope at returns, miter at corners, to produce tight fitting joint with full surface contact throughout length of joint. E. Anchor finish carpepn work to anchorage divides or blocking built-in directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinish matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finish surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. F. Casework: Install without distortion so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. G. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. 3.04 HANGING DOORS, INSTALLING HARDWARE: A. Receive, store, be responsible for and install all builder's hardware furnished under Section 08700 BUILDER'S HARDWARE. B. Receive, store, protect, and hang wood doors furnished under Section 08210 WOOD DOORS. C. Apply required hardware is prepared openings in metal doors and frames. Drill and tap for all surface applied hardware. D. Apply all hardware in accordance with manufacturer's directions, using fasteners provided. 06200 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.06 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly replace woodwork. Adjust joiner for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish c=egja work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch- up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustment for proper operation. D. Refer to Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work. E. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 06200 06200 - 9 4/2/9 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 07200 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, insulation materials and equipment necessary to complete the work as required by the drawings and as specified herein, generally to include: 1. Vapor barrier at exterior walls. 2. Rigid board insulation at foundation walls. 3. Rigid insulation board below membrane roofmg. 4. Glass fiber batts at ceilings between wood trusses. 5. Glass fiber batts at interior partitions. 6. Ventilation channels between roof rafters. 7. All adhesives or applied clips recommended by insulation manufacturer to complete insulation installation. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. The following materials furnished under this section shall be installed under other sections: 1. 10" acoustical glass fiber batts above ceiling. 2. 3-1/2" acoustical glass fiber batts at interior partitions. 3. 4" styrofoam insulation under membrane at roof. 07200 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these Specifications: 1. Installation of acoustical insulation is specified under Section 09250. 2. Installation of roof insulation is specified under Section 07530. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The R values for the insulation materials shall be as determined by "The Standard for Mineral Wool Building Insulation", 1960 Edition, of the NMWIA. R values listed are minimum requirements. 1. The minimum "R" value of the rigid insulation at exterior foundation walls shall be 15.0. 2. The minimum "R" value of the batt insulation at exterior walls shall be 19.0. The minimum "R" value of the entire exterior wall system shall be 21.49. 3. The minimum "R" value of the 4" styrofoam insulation under the membrane shall be 30.2. The minimum "R" value of the entire framed roof system shall be 32.81. 4. The minimum "R" value of the batt insulation at ceiling shall be 30.0. The minimum "R" value of the entire trusssed roof system shall be 32.61. B. All insulation materials shall be properly identified on the package with the manufacturer's name and R value, and shall indicate the fiber material. C. All polyisocyanurate and extruded polystrene foam boards shall have a chloroflurocarbon (CFC) limit of 5% and shall be 95% non-ozone depleting hydrochloroflurocarbon (HCFC-142b). 07200 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit 3 samples of each type of insulation material (that is not named in the specifications) to be used on the project to the Architect for approval. Samples shall clearly indicate manufacturer's marking and fiber designations. B. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Examination of Substrate: The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Installer. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Store all materials on the site in a dry area protected from the weather. B. Do not install insulation until the construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or set the insulation material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Owen-Corning Corporation. 2. Dow Chemical Company. 3. Amoco Foam Products, Inc. 4. United States Gypsum Company. 5. CertainTeed 07200 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Exterior walls shall receive unfaced fiberglass battens with 6 mil vapor barrier on vapor barrier side and shall have am minimum value of R19 at exterior walls. Materials shall meet or exceed ASTM C 665-84 Type III, Class A flame spread 25. Size shall be 6-1/4" unless otherwise noted. B. Tapered (Roof) Insulation: Material shall be square edge polyisocyanurate insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company or equal approved by the Architect, 4" thick insulation R 30 under membrane at roof. C. Rigid foundation insulation shall be 2" expanded polystryrene foam "Styrofoam" by Dow Chemical Company. D. Ceiling insulation at trussed roof areas shall be minimum 10" fiberglass blankets laid between and parallel to truss bottom cord as manufactured by U.S.G.or Owens-Corning. Materials shall meet or exceed ASTM C 665-84, Type I, Class A flame spread 25 and have a minimum R-value of 30.0. E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all interior partitions are to receive sound insulation fiberglass blankets as manufactured by U.S.G. or Owens- Corning equal to the thickness of the interior partition. Sound attenuation fiberglass blankets shall be installed from floor slab to underside of deck above. Materials shall meet or exceed ASTM C 665-84, Type I, Class A flame spread 25. F. Between roof rafters, provide polystrene ventilation channels above the fiberglass blanket insulation. Allow one inch air space between ventilation channel and underside of roof deck. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: The type recommended by the insulation manufacturer, and complying with fire-resistant requirements. 2. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type of application shown and condition of substrate. 3. Wire stay ties: The type recommended by the insulation manufacturer for hanging unfaced ceiling insulation between truss cords. 07200 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - INSULATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. B. Do not install insulation until the construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material. C. Exercise extreme care where an integral vapor barrier is specified to maintain the vapor barrier continuous over entire wall. Patch all tears in vapor barrier. D. Fully insulate all small areas between closely spaced framing members. E. Cut and fit insulation material around pipes, conduits and outlet boxes, as necessary to maintain the integrity of the insulation. F. Secure vapor barrier tight to studs and top and bottom plates. Tape seams. G. Where pipes are located in stud spaces to receive insulation, place insulation between exterior walls and the pipe, compressing insulation if necessary. 3.02 INSTALLATION - INSULATION AT INTERIOR CEILINGS: A. Wire-up installation: Utilize 16 or 18 gauge line wire run diagonally or perpendicular to insulation every 18 to 24". END OF SECTION 07200 07200 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 07310 - SHINGLES FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED PART ! - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID" under: Section 07310 ROOFING: SHINGLES. B. Each Sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS under: Section 07310 ROOFING: SHINGLES. The forms are furnished by the Awarding Authority and included in this project Manual as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of Massachusetts General Laws C. Sub-bids for the roofing work shall be for the complete work (Shingles: Section 07310 and Membrane: Section 07530) and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered Al through A9 inclusive. 07310 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: (Continued) E. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes to use to perform the following classes of work on part therof and the bid price therefor. CLASS OF WORK REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS Shingles Section 07310 Membrane Roofing Section 07530 F. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall submit evidence of his qualifications to perform the membrane roofing work as bid. The required qualification information shall list in paragraph H of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the recent buildings in which the work was of similar character as is required for this project. G. In any case in which the Sub-bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the class of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB- BID, but not his bid price. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of shingle roofing is shown on drawings and as described in the specifications and includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of Shingles and Building Paper. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Tune of roofing specified in this section include the following: 1. Fiberglas-based asphalt shingles. 07310 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Roof drains and vent stacks specified under PLUMBING section, but flashed under the roof of this Section. 2. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 3. Flexible Sheet Roofing System Section 07530 4. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain roofing from a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience in the manufacutre of fiberglas shingles. B. Installer: A firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. C. Underwriters Laboratories Acceptance: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories for application indicated. Roofing materials must have a Class A and Wind Resistance Label. Material shall meet ASTM D3018, Type 1 and D3161, Type 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of roofing materials for types of roofing required. B. Submit samples of the following materials for approval by the Architect. Color of shingles shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Shingles: Two of each style selected indicating full range of color. 07310 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. Do not apply shingles when air temperature is below 40 oF. 1.06 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: A. Provide written warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer of primary roofing materials, agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship, including significant leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration of materials, and other failure of asphalt shingle roofmg to perform as required within warranty period. Repair and replacements required because of Acts of God and other events beyond Contractor's/Installer's/ Manufacturer's control (and which exceed performance requirements) shall be completed by Contractor/ Installer and paid for by Owner at prevailing rates. 1. Warranty period is 25 years after date of substantial completion. 2. Similarly, provide flashing endorsement covering same period as above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing to be equal or better than specified in every significant respect and acceptable to Architect. B. Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. 07310 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 SHINGLES: A. General: Provide three-tab design asphalt Fiberglas-based shingles, 235-240# per square, 12" x 36", 5" exposure, self-sealing, ceramic coated granules. B. Texture and Color: Provide a shingle which matches as closely as possible the existing building shingle. Provide two colors of shingles and match the "two row strip" pattern which exists on the existing building roof. B. Products/Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: IKO Roofmg Products, "Aristocrat 25" Bird Incorporated, Roofscapes "Fireline" CertainTeed Corporation, "CertainTeed 25" GAF Corporation, Building Materials Division "Royal Sovereign" Manville Corporation, "FireKing III" 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Asphalt Coated Underlay ASTM D-226-81, fiberglas unperforated, 36" wide. B. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: For use as starter course or vent flashing flange and valley application. C. Smooth Surfaced Roll Roofing: For use with valley application. D. Adhesive: Bituminous Plastic Cement shall be SS-C, Type 1, Class A and Type 1, Class B. E. Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized or aluminum 11 or 12 ga. barbed shank, 3/8" head, sharp pointed convential, or sufficent length to penetrate at least 3/4" into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. F. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Pre-cut manufacturer's standard or job-cut shingles. 07310 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to shingles. Remove any sharp projection. B. Install ridge vents, flashings, and similar accessory items as shown. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Underlayment: 1. Fasten metal drip edge along the bottom edges (eaves) before felt is laid and the sides (rakes) after the felt is laid. 2. Lay one layer of underlayment horizontally over entire roof, lapping each course 2" minimum at horizontal joints, and 4" side lap at end joints. 3. Lap underlayment 6" from botn sides over hips and ridges. 4. Secure underlayment to substrate with sufficient fasteners to hold in place until shingles are applied. B. Closed Valley Flashing: 1. Lay a 36" wide valley liner of smooth surface roll roofing or heavier. Fasten outer edges only. 2. Lay all shingles on one side of valley and across centerline of valley a minimum of 12". Fasten a minimum of 6" away from center line on each side of valley. 3. Stick a chalk line 2" from the centerline of the unshingled side up to chalk line and trim, taking care not to cut the underlaying shingles. Trim upper comers of these shingles, cement and fasten. 07310 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: (Continued) C. Step Flashing: 1. Cut metal flashing pieces 7" x 10" and bend in half, 7" x 5" each side. 2. Fasten each flashing piece to the roof at the top edge with two roofing fasteners. Apply shingles on top of metal set in black plastic cement. 3. To allow for possible roof movement, do not fasten flashing to wall. 4. Insert a metal counter flashing under siding and bend down over the step flashing. D. Vent Pipes and/or Mechanical Projections: 1. Apply shingles up to vent pipe and cut hole in next shingle to go over pipe. Set the shingle in black plastic cement. 2. Cut a flashing flange of mineral surfaced roofing or metal or use a pre- manufactured flashing flange and place over shingle and vent pipe. Set in black plastic cement. 3. Cut and install remaining shingles around vent pipe. E. Starter Strips: 1. Apply 9" minimum mineral surfaced roll roofing even with lower edge of eaves or use shingles with tabs cut off as a starter strip. Starter strips shall overhang the eaves and rake by 1/2". Fasten starter strip using same spacing as for shingles, and locate fasteners about 3" up from the bottom edge. Avoid fastening where cut-outs will occur on the first course of shingles. F. Fasteners: 1. Place fasteners 5 5/8" above shingle butt edge, 1" from each side edge and 1" to either side of the two cut-outs. 07310 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: (Continued) G. Shingles: 1. Snap horizontal chalk lines as guide to installation of shingles. Use these chalk lines to keep the shingle cut-outs in alignment during the application. A cut-out must never come over a cut-out in the row immediately below. 2. Place one fasteners 1" from each end of shingle and one 12" in from each end, four fasteners in each shingle. All four fasteners must be placed on a line 5 5/8" above the butt edge of the shingle and just below the self-sealing strip. 3. Shingle design is for 5" exposure. 4. Hip and ridge shingles can be cut from standard three-tab shingles. Cut 3 ridge shingles per 3 tab shingle. Bend each shingle equally over the ridge. if weather is cold, warm shingles until flexible to prevent cracking. Start on end of ridge opposite prevailing wind. Expose shingles 5", using two fasteners each, 5 1/2" from the exposed butt end and 1" from the side edges. Start hips at bottom. Apply ridge after hips are installed Finish with last ridge cap piece set in black plastic cement. Do not leave any fasteners exposed. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANUP: A. Remove and replace shingles damaged during the construction period, including nature causes, accidents and vandalism. B. Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each day's work. END OF SECTION 07310 07310 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 07530 - FLEXIBLE SHEET ROOFING SYSTEM (FULLY-ADHERED) FILE SUB-BID REQUIRED PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID" under: Section 07310 ROOFING: SHINGLES. B. Each Sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS under: Section 07310 ROOFING: SHINGLES. The forms are furnished by the Awarding Authority and included in this project Manual as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of Massachusetts General Laws C. Sub-bids for the roofing work shall be for the complete work (Shingles: Section 07310 and Membrane: Section 07530) and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered Al through A9 inclusive. 07530 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: (Continued) E. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes to use to perform the following classes of work on part therof and the bid price therefor. CLASS OF WORK REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS Shingles Section 07310 Membrane Roofing Section 07530 F. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall submit evidence of his qualifications to perform the membrane roofing work as bid. The required qualification information shall list in paragraph H of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the recent buildings in which the work was of similar character as is required for this project. G. In any case in which the Sub-bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the class of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB- BID, but not his bid price. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of shingle roofing is shown on drawings and as described in the specifications and includes, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of Shingles and Building Paper. B. Tune of roofing specified in this section include the following: 1. Fiberglas-based asphalt shingles. C. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of flexible sheet roofing (FSR) work is shown on drawings and as listed below, and is hereby defined to include: 1. Non-traffic-bearing sheet membrane system intended for weather exposure as primary roofing. 07530 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) B. Types of flexible sheet roofing specified in this section include smooth surface membrane fully adhered to substrate. C. The following materials furnished by others shall be installed under this Section. 1. Flashing and Treated Wood Nailers 1.02 UQ ALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain flexible sheet roofing from a single manufacturer. B. Installer: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of flexible sheet roofing system materials, for types of roofing required. Include data stating that materials comply with requirements. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.05 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: A. Provide written warranty for both labor and material, signed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer of primary roofing materials, agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship, including significant leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration of materials, and other failure of sheet roofing to perform as required within warranty period. Repair and replacements required because of Acts of God and other events beyond Contractor's/Installer's/ Manufacturer's control (and which exceed performance requirements) shall be completed by Contractor/ Installer and paid for by Owner at prevailing rates. 1. Warranty period is 10 years after date of substantial completion. 2. Similarly, provide flashing endorsement covering same period as above. 07530 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing to be equal or better than specified in every significant respect and acceptable to Architect. B. Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. 2.02 FULLY-ADHERED FSR SYSTEM: A. Elastometric sheet material, manufacturer's standard thickness but not less than 60 mils, 1300 psi minimum tensile strength (ASTM D412), 225% elongation, ultraviolet and ozone resistant, low temperature brittleness of-75 degree C, (ASTM D736), standard color. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS FOR FSR: A. Sheet Seaming S, sy tem: Manufacturer's standard materials for "plastic welding" of lapped joints to create seams of strength equal to sheet strength and including edge sealer to cover exposed sheet edges and eliminate loose edges and fishmouths. B. Cant Stries and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by manufacturer of FSR material, provided at locations indicated and at locations recommended by manufacturer; and including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants. Cant strips and wood nailers shall be treated with a water-borne preservative(s) which comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15%. Wood preservative used in roof cant strips or nailers shall be of a type approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use with his product. C. Adhesive and Accessories: Bonding adhesive, splicing cement, water cut-off mastic, lap sealant, night sealant, pipe sealant and prefabricated accessories shall be as furnished by same manufacturer of sheet membrane and shall be compatible with membrane system and all materials to which membrane, flashing and roofmg are bonded. Lap sealant for sealing exposed edges of splices shall be of trowel or gun grade as required. 07530 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer of FSR System must examine substrate and conditions under which roofing work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with roofing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for preparation of substrate to receive FSR System. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to FSR System work. Remove any sharp projection. C. Install a pressure treated, or Wolmanized wooden nailer around the perimeter. (Coal, tar or asphaltic treatments are unacceptable). The nailer shall be secured mechanically to the roof deck. The thickness of the nailer shall be such that the top of the nailer is flush with the surface to which the membrane is to be applied. D. Install cant str , flashings, and similar accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer even though not shown. 3.03 FULLY ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Elastometric sheet roofing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standard roofing specifications for material and methods of attachment of fully-adhered elastometric sheet roofmg over insulation. All material and methods of attachment must be approved by Factory Mutual. B. Position the first roll of FSR square with roof, and provide sufficient material to facilitate flashing as covered in the job specifications. C. Run membrane 1" to 2" pass perimeter edge. Mechanically fasten at perimeter nailer using nails with 1" discs on 8" centers with 3/8" head roofing nails or as required to meet manufacturer's pullout resistance requirements. 07530 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 FULLY ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM INSTALLATION: (Continued) D. Apply deck adhesive to the surface using roller or spray, at a rate of approximately 100-125 square feet per gallon immediately rolling FSR into the wet adhesive. Repositioning of the membrane is possible, if necessary, if transparent, it must be recoated before placing the membrane. E. Use a soft broom to push out any entrapped air and assure full contact of the membrane backing to the concrete surface. After bonding an adequate length of membrane, fold back the remaining amount of unbonded material. Apply deck adhesive to the concrete surface, lay in membrane, and then brush out. F. Install the second and succeeding rolls in the same manner. Be certain that the selvedge overlaps the previously laid (adjacent) membrane by the proper amount, at least 1 1/2". G. Always join seams working from one end to the other. Fold back the selveage and apply lap adhesive using a 2" wide natural bristle paint brush or a roller. Form lap adhesive on the entire selveage underside. H. Carefully assemble the adjoining surfaces to assure that no wrinkles are formed. Roll across the entire seam to insure positive contact. I. Caulk a bead of lap sealant along the edge of the lap joint and feather each edge of the bead. Do not apply lap sealant in areas to be flashed prior to installation of flashing. J. Care should be exercised to insure that water does not flow beneath any existing or completed sections of roof, by temporarily sealing the loose edge of the membrane with Sure-Seal Nite Seal when the weather is threatening. Mix the two components thoroughly according to the instructions on the label. Apply the Nite Seal at a rate of 125 lineal feet per gallon, twelve (12) inches back from the edge of the sheet. It may be necessary to use a trowel to spread the material in order to achieve the prescribed coverage. After embedding the membrane in the Nite Seal, weight the edge, providing continuous pressure over the length of the cutoff. When work is resumed, pull the sheet free before the installation is continued. Allow no unfinished roof areas or exposed roof sheathing to be left uncovered or unprotected in wet weather or at night. 07530 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 INSPECTION: A. After installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative of roof system manufacturer in order to ascertain that the roofing system has been installed properly. Provide written report of representative's observations and acceptance of roof system. END OF SECTION 07530 07530 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of each type of and sheet metal work is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. The Wes of work specified in this section include the following: 1. Metal counter flashing; and base flashing (if any). 2. Metal wall flashing. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 4. Elastic flashing. 5. Gravel Stops and Fascias. 6. Gutters and Downspouts. 7. Ridge Vents and Undereave Vents. D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these Specifications: 1. Insulation Section 07200 2. Shingles Section 07310 2. Flexible Sheet Roofing System Section 07530 3. Roof drains and vent stacks specified under PLUMBING Section but flashed as part of the roofmg work. 07600 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing layout, joining. profiles, and anchorages of fabricated work, including major counter flashings, and expansion joint systems; layouts at 1/4" scale, details at 3" scale. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALS: A. Sheet Metal Flashin /g Trim: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, clear anodized finish; 0.032" thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated. B. Elastic Sheet Flashing/Membrane: Manufacturer's standard flexible, elastic, black, non-reinforced, flashing sheet of 50 - 65 mils thickness; 50 - 70 Shore A hardness (ASTM D 2240); 1200 psi tensile strength (ASTM D 412); 120 lbs. per lin.in. tear resistance (ASTM D 624, Die C); ultimate elongation of 250% (ASTM D 412); brittleness temperature of-30 degrees Farhenheit (ASTM D746), resistance for 100 hours in 50 pphm ozone at 104 degrees Farhenheit (ASTM 573); resistance to heat aging of maximum hardness increase of 15 points, elongation reduction of 40% and tensile strength reduction of 30% for 70 hours at 212 degrees Farhenheit (ASTM D573). Provide EPDM synthetic rubber sheet. 07600 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts C. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Nails used for fastening aluminum shall be approved aluminum nails of the Stronghold type, with large, flat head, anneals threads and needle points, and not be smaller than No. 12 Stubs gauge and of sufficient length to penetrate wood blocking not less than 7/8". 2. Elastometric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed; comply with FS TT- S-0027, TT-S-00230, OR TT-S-001543. 3. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by manufacturer for exterior/interior non- moving joints including riveted joints. 4. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. 5. Reglets: Metal or plastic units of the type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated, uncorrosive. 6. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive, size and gage required for performance. 7. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed- cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. 07600 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATED UNITS: A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil- canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, for seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints) D. Sealant Joints: Where moveable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, for metal to provide for proper installation of elastometric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. F. Aluminum Extrusion Units: Fabricate extruded aluminum running units with formed or extruded aluminum joint covers, for installation behind main members where possible. Fabricate mitered and welded comer units. Finish on aluminum extrusion units to be anodized bronze. 07600 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATED UNITS: (Continued) G. Gravel Stops: Form gravel stops, caps and fascias of aluminum in lengths of 8'-0" or use preformed aluminum as specified above. Set lengths into a layer of two (2) plies of felt. Bend aluminum to form gravel stops or cap and extend down to fascia, securing with a 3/4" loose lock to previously placed edge strip to form drip or extend into roofmg as above. Provide expansion joints filled with approved caulking compound before assembly. Finish on gravel stops to be anodized bronze. H. Drip Edges: Aluminum units (.027"), compatible with flashing indicated, uncorrosive. I. Gutters and Downspouts: Furnish and install dark bronze finished aluminum (.027") gutters and downspouts and all necessary corners, fittings, brackets and other components in the location shown on the drawings. Provide rigid stiffener brackets tied to rafter extentions for necessary support. 1. Remove existing gutters and downspouts as required by new construction. Replace those sections of gutters not capable of being modified for reuse. J. Ridge Vents: Furnish and install aluminum finished ridge vents and all necessary caps, fittings, brackets, and other components as manufactured by Alcoa, Air Vent, Inc., "Filtervent", Ampcor "RV10" or approved equal. K. Undereave Vents: Furnish and install continous 2-3/4" undereave vent as manufactured by Ampcor "RV12" or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REOUIREMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to lin and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. All metal flashing in conjunction with the elastometric roofmg membrane, shall be installed and flashed using elastometric flashing material in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Mastics, sealants, lap slices shall be used to flash sheet metal flashings. 07600 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: (Continued) B. UnderlUment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of paper slip sheet and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. Bed flames of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. D. Install Reglets to receive counter flashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where shown in concrete, furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections. 1. Install counterflashine in reglets, either by shaping seal arrangement, or by wedging in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastometric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of sealant exposure. This installer shall furnish and apply one part acrylic sealant continuously along the top of the reglet. Sealant shall be approved by the Architect in color selected. Application of sealant shall be in accordance with requirements set forth under SEALANT Section. Include application of primers to ensure positive adhesion of sealant. E. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6". Complete seams at joints between units, to form a continuous waterproof system. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction, to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 07600 07600 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the caulking and sealant work as required by the drawings and as specified herein. 1. Prepare and seal all joints between dissimilar materials on building exterior as indicated and/or required to obtain water and air tight seals. 2. Prepare and seal all interior joints between dissimilar materials as indicated and/or required to insure positive seals a. Plumbing fixtures b. Sound integrity C. Exterior/interior door header,jambs, and thresholds d. Exterior/interior windows 3. Perform balance of caulking and sealing as may be necessary and/or required to insure conformance to guarantee/warranty provisions contained herein. 4. Compressed Filler for Expansion Joints. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 07900 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Glass and Glazing Section 08800. 2. Mastic and adhesives for wall and floor finishes under applicable sections. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Exterior Caulking Compound shall meet or exceed Federal Specification TT- 5-00230C. B. Interior Caulking Compound shall meet or exceed Federal Specification TT- C-598B. C. Floor and Deck Sealant shall meet or exceed Federal Specification TT-S- 00227E, Class B, Type I. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of material required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the application shown. Show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the Installer. 1.04 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 07900 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Exterior Sealant: One component polyurethane sealant- Pecora "Dynatrol 1 Pecora "AC-20", Sonolac, Bostik, DAP, or approved equal. B. Interior Caulking Compound: Except as noted otherwise shall be gun-grade elastic compound meeting or exceeding Federal Specification TT-C-598B; equal to "synthetic Resin, by the Tremco Manufacturing Company, "Vulcatex" by W.R. Grace Company, or "Elastic Caulking Compound" by Percora, Inc., as approved by the Architect. It shall form a tough, durable elastic skin on the surface while remaining plastic and adhesive under the skin. Use polyurethane sealant above at sleeves and where joint movement is expected. C. Floor and Deck Sealant: At exterior and interior joints in floors, decks, etc., shall be a hard setting pouring-grade self-leveling 100% solids two-part urethane sealant meeting or exceeding Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Class B, Type I Shore A hardness of 35 to 45 equal to Peterson's "Isoflex", Master Mechanics, "Vulkem" or Tremco THC900". Sealant shall withstand total water immersion adhered to concrete when elongated 25%. Joint preparation shall be as approved by sealant manufacturer to secure standard five (5) year guarantee against adhesive and cohesive failure in normal use. D. Glazing and Construction Sealant: One-part silcone sealant equal to Pecora "863", Tremco, Bostik, DAP, or approved equal. E. Compressed Filler for Expansion Joint: Non-asphaltic polybutylene- waterproofed polyurethene foam compressed to 1/2 width before installation equal to Sandell's "Poly-tite" in sizes as required. F. Primer: For all caulking where recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Use proper materials specified above for each location and use regardless of whether drawings called for "caulking" or "sealant". H. Compounds shall contain no acids or ingredients that will stain vinyl siding, masonry, corrode metal or have injurious effects on paint. I. Compounds shall be bronze, black, grey, white or of manufacturer's standard color(s), as selected by Architect to match adjacent materials. 07900 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF CAULKING AND SEALANTS: A. Joints and spaces to be caulked shall be clean, dry, and free of dust. Clean metal surfaces with solvent to remove all surface oils. B. Backing of interior joints will not be required, except where depth of joint exceeds 3/4". In such cases, fill with joint backing material to approximately 3/4" from surface. C. Caulking compounds shall generally be applied by means of a hand gun. Exercise extreme care to prevent smearing of adjacent surfaces. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solidly. D. Where work is to be field-painted, caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surfaces. E. Recess interior caulking and sealant around all frames to form reveal where so detailed. F. In all applications, strictly follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding surface preparation, priming, and application procedure. Sealant may be applied with suitable pressure equipment, as described above, or, at horizontal applications only, poured from containers, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.02 CLEANING: A. Remove excess caulking compound and sealant and leave surfaces neat, smooth, and clean, without smears on surrounding work. Tool joints where recommended by manufacturer or required by Architect. B. Remove all cartons and debris from site and legally dispose of same as the work progresses. END OF SECTION 07900 07900 - 4 4/2/97 i n d Y Q w F- s a Q a w w w w W w w w w w w w z z z z z z z z z z z z > m m o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o m o 0 o m N (J J (A Z Z Z z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z z Z Z 19 Z W S U N O 0 0 00 00 I, LL) r N 'c}' I- n M M J 0 cr- cc cr cr- cr- Uj 2 2 2 2 2 5 2 S S S S 2 2 V M � M M M M M J Q m M M M M M M M M M M M M M cn N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N O H 2 (n cn to (n (n (n do (n (n (n (n cn (n (n cn (n (n Q N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Q W N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N U- H >- G. V I a I O a 0 0 Ulu 0 a 0 0 0 0 U a U J J 01012 0 claim 0 01010 O 0 J 0 0 a O a m 2 ¢ Q 3 � � � � � � 3r � � ¢ 3 3 3: Q 0 0 1- d m m U ul O a U U U U U ¢ U U ¢ m U U U Ulm m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N X X o X O X O o 0 0 0 X O O X X O o X 0 0 0 cn q q X q X X M Q X X Q Q X X 0 0 m N X O X D X co M O M o 0 p O O O M N M N N M M M m O O N M dm o i� ttO O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 C o .- Z r- NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES: PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is shown and scheduled on drawings. The work of this Section consists of furnishing of all hollow metal doors and frames and related items as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including, but not limited to., the following: 1. Exterior and interior standard and fire-rated knock-down pressed steel door frames. 2. Exterior insulated and interior standard and fire-rated shop-fabricated hollow metal flush face doors. 3. All wall and floor anchors, clips, and other related items necessary to complete each assembly. 4. Compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. requirements, as scheduled, and providing of U.L. labels of indicated types and hour- ratings. 5. Metal glazing beads, loosely screwed to doors and frames, for removal and permanent installation during glazing operations under Section 08800. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 08100 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Continued) C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Installation of wood doors and hollow metal doors Section 06200. 2. Installation of hollow metal and wood frames Section 06100. 3. Finish hardware and templates, weatherstripping, and thresholds furnished under BUILDER HARDWARE, Section 08700, and installed under FINISH CARPENTRY, Section 06200. 4. Finish painting of hollow metal doors and frames, Section 09900. 5. Building-in of frame anchors, by trade responsible for wall construction. 6. Glazing of fixed glass frames, Section 08800. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. B. Manufacturer: Provide standard flush steel doors and frames from one of the following firms: Amweld Building Products Division Ceco Corporation Curries Manufacturing, Inc. Dittco Products Division Fenestra Mesker Industries, Inc. Republic Building Production Corporation SteelCraft Manufacturing Company Weathershield Or Approved Equal C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide fire-rated doors investigated and tested as fire door assemblies, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 08100 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference number for details and openings as those on contract drawings. C. Label Construction Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification for oversize fire-rated doors and frames that each assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repair provided finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at least 4" high, or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, a written guarantee against faulty materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the project. 08100 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. The guarantee shall state that any defect in the work of this section which may develop within the guarantee period shall be repaired and made good in every respect promptly upon written notification and without additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525 G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized for exterior applications. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built in to exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles, and rails of non-flush. C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel (at fabricators' option). 08100 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: (Continued) D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels. E. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. Maximum apparent U facto for thermal-rated assemblies of doors without glass is 0.07 BTU/hr. (ft ) 0F. F. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frames preparation for hardware. G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. H. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. I. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. Clean steel surfaces of mil scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. Where prime coating has been abraded, marked, scratched, or destroyed, or where rust spots show through after installation, touch-up with equivalent primer, after properly removing all rust from the affected areas and sanding to a satisfactorily smooth surface. 08100 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS: Provide metal doors of type and styles indicated on drawings or schedules. A. Flush steel doors shall be custom grade 1-3/4" thick, except as noted otherwise, with each face formed of a single sheet of 16-gauge stretcher- leveled cold-rolled furniture steel, reinforced on the inside with continuous, interlocking 28-gauge vertical stiffeners spaced not over 6" on center. Tops and bottoms of doors shall be reinforced with continuous channels spot- welded to both sheets. Reinforce edges with continuous channels not less than 16 gauge and finish flush. Tops of exterior doors shall be finished flush to prevent accumulation of moisture. B. An approved type of mineral rock wool sound-deadening material shall be provided in cores, stiles, and rails of doors, and transoms. C. All exposed joints shall be welded and weld marks shall be ground smooth, leaving no visible trace of the joints. Finished surfaces shall be smooth and entirely free from buckles 6r other imperfections. D. Provide all other necessary and proper reinforcing for panic devices, locksets, closers, butts, and all other hardware. Reinforcing plates for butts, locks, and closers shall be at least as thick as the diameter of screws used for securing hardware. Reinforcing plates for butts shall be securely welded in at least four (4) places, each weld to be 1-1/2" long. E. Doors to receive glass shall have fixed stops integral with door assembly. Removable stops for door lights shall be of rectangular (channel) section, set for glass thickness indicated, and attached with flat-head countersunk screws slightly behind face panels. 2.04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of type and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. A. Steel door and partition frames and mullions shall be of cold-rolled and annealed steel, formed to profiles as shown. Exterior frames shall be of hot dip galvanized steel. Except as otherwise indicated, exterior frames shall be 14-gauge; interior frames, 16-gauge. B. Except as otherwise indicated, all door frames shall be knock-down construction and formed with additional return legs for installation into a completed drywall partitions. 08100 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: (Continued) C. Door frames shall be mortised and provided with reinforcement for all hardware including door checks and closers. Reinforcement plates shall be at least as thick as diameter of screws used for securing hardware. Frames will be rejected if plates do not comply with this requirements. Plates shall be offset so that faces of butts are flush with face of rabbet. Reinforcement shall be securely welded in place at factory an tapped for all screws. Weld each plate in at least four (4) places, each weld to be 1-1/2" long. On frames for doors over 3'-6" wide provide continuous switch welded reinforcing plate full height of door. Provide strike plate reinforcing spot- welded to jambs and steel cover boxes in back of all hardware cut-outs. D. Frames at UL labeled doors shall bear the UL Frame Label. E. Heads of door frames over 3'-0" wide shall be reinforced with concealed continuous 12-gauge steel header channels welded to frame. F. Punch Door Frames for silencers, Three (3) on lock jamb of single doors, two (2) in head of each double door leaf. G. Coordinate work with Hardware Supplier for templates sizes or butts, door closers, etc., and sizes, diameters and locations of screws used to secure hardware. H. Frames to receive glass shall have integral fixed stops. Provide removable channel stops for fixed glass and louver installations, as indicated. All stops shall be of simple rectangular section, with flat-head countersunk screws for installation. I. Frames shall rest on concrete slabs, have temporary bottom spreader bars and be secured with concealed clip-angles and wall anchors as specified hereinafter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 08100 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. Except for frames located at in- place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Door frames without sidelights or transoms shall have not less than three (3) wall anchors and one (1) clip-angle type floor anchor per jamb. 2. Door frame with sidelights, and all interior hollow metal partition frames shall have three (3) wall anchors, one (1) clip-angle type floor anchor and one (1) clip-angle type ceiling anchor at each outside jamb or frame members. In addition, provide thru-bolt anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" on center, along length of ceiling and floor members, with one (1) such anchor located within 4" of each door frame jamb not anchored by clip-angle method. 3. Jamb and head extensions of 12 gauge steel formed to details shall be furnished as required to assure substantial anchorage of frames to the building structure except where frames occur in masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wall Anchors at Masonry (Except UL Labeled Frame): Adjustable or welded tee or strap anchors, 12" minimum length, 16 gauge steel, crimped or perforated per manufacturer's standards. 5. Wall Anchors at Construction Other Than Concrete and Masonry: as indicated or, in lieu of specific indications, as recommended by frame manufacturer for each of of the required conditions, subject to approval of the Architect. 6. All anchorage shall be concealed, no exposed fastener shall be accepted. 08100 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: (Continued) C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100. Place fire-rated doors with clearance as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch-W: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protection plastic wrappings from pre-finished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08100 08100 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on drawings and in schedules. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Tyne of doors required include the following: 1. Solid wood interior doors with glass panels. 2. Solid core flush wood interior doors. D. Compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. requirements, as scheduled, and providing of U.L. labels of indicated types and hour-ratings. E. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Installation of Wood Doors Section 06200 2. Builder's Hardware/Furnished Section 08700 3. Builder's Hardware/Installed Section 06200 4. Painting Section 09900 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. 08210 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 UQ ALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide fire-rated doors investigated and tested as fire door assemblies, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated: 1. ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1, "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors" published by National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA). 2. AWI Oualitv Standard: Section 1300 of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). Designations for grade and core construction under types of doors refer to this standard. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door. B. Shon Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, finishing and other pertinent data. C. Specific Product Wag : Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWL 1. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty period of one year shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial completion. 08210 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and Finish of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions. B. Package doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer's standard recommended method. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Submit to compliance with requirements, provide standard interior doors by one of the following: Weyerhauser Company Eggers Hardwood Products Corp Enjo Wood Doors Maiman Millwork Co. Morgan Door Co. Sun-Dor-Co Or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Solid Wood Interior Doors with glass an nels: 1. Construction: Western Pine, Poplar, Birch, Maple, Fir or Hemlock. Doors shall have parts of solid clear kiln dried lumber and assembled with 5/8" hardwood dowels. All faces are to be machined sanded, ready to receive painted finish in the field. Stiles shall be minimum of (1) piece without finger joints and be a minimum 5 1/2" in width. Rails shall be minimum 6-3/8" in. width. Door shall be fire-rated construction. 2. Thickness: Shall be standard thickness (1 3/4") for doors Y-0" wide or less. 3. Glass: Glass shall be wire glass set in rated metal frame. 08210 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: (Continued) B. Solid Wood Interior Flush Doors: 1. Construction: Western Pine, Poplar Birch, Maple, Fir or Hemlock. Doors shall be of particle board core construction, with edge bands and blocking held together with water-bond resistant adhesive. All faces are to be standard thickness (1/28") veneer, machined sanded, ready to receive painted finish in the field. Stiles shall be minimum of (1) piece without finger joints and be a minimum 4-3/8" in width. Rails shall be minimum 4-3/8" in. width. 2. Thickness: Shall be standard thickness (13/4") for doors 3'-0" wide or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Condition: Doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 "Builders Hardware" section of these specifications. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown. D. Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections in Division 9 of these specification for requirements for finishing wood doors. 08210 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by Architect. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. C. Protection of Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. END OF SECTION 08210 08210 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - ,GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. As relates to each trade, the Mechanical, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Plumbing Contractors shall furnish for installation by the Contractor, all access doors in locations where valves, controls, fire dampers, balancing dampers, wells, instruments or other equipment are installed above gypsum board/plaster ceilings or behind walls and would be inaccessible for inspecting maintenance and servicing; such access doors shall be sized and located in a manner approved by the Architect and of the types specified hereinafter for specific applications. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these specifications: 1. Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 2. Painting Section 09900 08305 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALIT Y ASSURANCE: A. Fire-Resistant Ratings: Wherever a fire-resistance classifications is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; "Classified Building Materials Index: for rating shown. 1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated door. B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units with may vary slightly from sizes indicated. C. Manufacturer: Provide access doors by one of the following: Birmingham Ornamental Iron Co. Karp Associates, Inc. Milcor Division; Inryco, Inc. Nystrom, Inc. The Peelle Co. D. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Doors shall be constructed of steel with primer coat of rust inhibitive paint, continuous hinge and as follows: 1. Suspended latch and plaster ceilings - Style K with 16 gauge frame, 14 gauge panel flush screw-driven operated cam locks. 08305 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Comely with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305. 08305 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08335 - ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER FIRE DOORS: PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of standard steel overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides is shown and scheduled on drawings. The work of this Section consists of furnishing of all steel overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides and related items as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including, but not limited to, the following: 1. All new metal steel overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides. 2. All wall and floor anchors, clips, vertical supports members, and other related items necessary to complete each assembly. 3. Compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. requirements, as scheduled, and providing of U.L. labels of indicated types and hour- ratings. B. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Finish painting of exposed portions of steel overhead rolling doors Section 09900 2. Electrical Work Section 16000 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Provide standard steel overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides as manufactured Raynor Door Co., The Overhead Door Corporation, The Cookson Company, Kinnear Door Company, or approved equal. 08335 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALIT Y ASSURANCE: (Continued) C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide fire-rated steel overhead rolling counter fire doors investigated and tested as fire door assemblies. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel overhead rolling counter fire doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel overhead rolling doors and guides. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide schedule of overhead rolling doors and guides using same reference number for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repair provided finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.. 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, a written guarantee against faulty materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the project. B. The guarantee shall state that any defect in the work of this section which may develop within the guarantee period shall be repaired and made good in every respect promptly upon written notification and without additional expense to the Owner. 08335 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 525 and ASTM A 526. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525 G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized for exterior applications. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built in to exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied lied Paint: Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Fabricate steel overhead rolling counter fire door units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. B. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. Clean steel surfaces of mil scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 08335 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: (Continued) Where prime coating has been abraded, marked, scratched, or destroyed, or where rust spots show through after installation, touch-up with equivalent primer, after properly removing all rust from the affected areas and sanding to a satisfactorily smooth surface. 2.03 STEEL OVERHEAD ROLLING COUNTER FIRE DOORS: A. Rolling steel counter fire doors shall be Model UCP Series, interior face mounted as manufactured by Raynor Door Corporation or approved equal. 2.04 CURTAIN: A. Curtain shall be interlocking roll-formed flat slats, 22 gauge hot-dipped (G90) steel. Curtain slats shall incorporate a two coat, baked-on prime paint applied prior to roll-forming to assure complete and even coverage. B. Endlocks shall be zinc plated and attached to the slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement. C. Bottom Bar shall be tubular shaped to reinforce curtain with foam rubber astragal for sill protection. 2.05 GUIDES: A. Guides shall be 13 gauge (galvanized painted steel) box shaped. Guides shall be fastened to vertical tube supports via bolts. 2.06 BRACKETS: A. Bracket plates for mounting curtain and barrel assembly shall be minimum of 10 gauge, hot-dipped, galvanzied steel. 2.07 BARREL: A. The barrel shall be made from a minimum 4-1/2" O.D. X .120" wall structure steel pipe. Deflection of pipe under full load shall not exceed .03" per foot of span. 08335 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.08 COUNTERBALANCE: A. The curtain shall be counterbalanced by means of oil tempered, helical torsion springs, grease-packed and mounted on a single continous steel torsion shaft. Springs shall be compression spring design to facilite any counterbalance maintenance. 2.09 HOOD: A. Hood shall be rectangular 24 gauge galvanized painted steel with rolled edges. Provide intermediate support brackets as required by opening width. 2.10 OPERATION: A. Automatic closure of overhead rolling counter fire door shall be thermally controlled by means of smoke/heat detectors (165 degree). Automatic closing shall have a rate of descent controlled by a governor for safety. B. Manual operation of overhead rolling counter fire door shall be provided by lifting handles and slide PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel overhead rolling counter fire doors and guides are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install steel overhead rolling counter fire doors, guides, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified, and shall be by installed an installer approved by the manufacturer. B. Install steel overhead rolling counter fire doors in accordance with the standards of the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet #80 (NFPA 80). C. Job Site Finish: See Painting Section 09900 of these specifications for requirements for finishing of steel overhead rolling doors and hoods. 08335 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch-w: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating steel overhead rolling door units, leavind doors and guides undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08335 08335 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of aluminum entrance unit is shown on drawings. B. Applications of aluminum entrances on project include the following: a. Exterior entrance doors. b. Frames for exterior entrance. C. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Caulking and Sealants Section 07900 2. Builders Hardware Section 08700 3. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements, for aluminum entrances, terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in ANSI/AAMA 302.9, "Entrance Manual" by NAAMM and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA. 08410 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Manufacturer: 1. Provide aluminum entrance units where required by manufacturer of those upon which drawings are based or by one of the following: CMI Architectural Products, Inc. Kawneer Co., Inc. Visawall Architectural Products United States Aluminum Corporation C. Performance and Testing: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 302.9. Fabricate exterior door and frame units to withstand 20 lbs. per sq.ft. on the gross area of the frames, doors, panels and glass acting inward and also acting outward. 2. Resistance to Water Infiltration: Glazed framing shall not leak when tested in accordance with ASTM E-311 at a test pressure of 7.5 PSF. 3. Performance Under Load: When tested in accordance with ASTM E- 330 the maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/175 of its span and when the load is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation of damage when tested under a load of 20 PSF. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and standard details for aluminum entrance units, including certified test laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including wall elevations at 1/2" scale, typical unit elevations at 3/4" scale, and full size detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, joint systems, expansion provisions, and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. 08410 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062" thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. Comply with ASTM B 221. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum entrance members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of entrance units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125" thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide noncorrosive pressed-in spliced grommet nuts. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. C. Anchors, Clins and Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion- inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 386. D. Weatherstripping: Provide woven pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip; comply with AAMA 701. E. Sealant: Provide type recommended by entrance manufacturer for joint size and movement, to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking and non- migrating. Comply with Section 07900 for installation of sealants. 2.02 ENTRANCE TYPES: A. Doors: Aluminum doors shall be medium stile 350 as manufactured by Kawneer Corp.., or equal approved by Architect. Doors shall be of sizes and configurations as called for in the door schedule, complete, and fitted with weatherstripping on all sides including door bottoms, and vinyl gasketed glazing beads. Provide all required beads, astragal (at all door pairs) clips, bolts, anchors, and other items required for complete installations. 08410 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 ENTRANCE TYPES: (Continued) B. Frames: Aluminum frames, sidelights, and other related items shall be 450/451 as manufactured by Kawneer Corp., or equal approved by Architect. Frames shall be of sizes and configurations as called for one the drawings, complete, and fitted with door stops. Provide all required beads, clips, bolts, anchors,and other items required for complete installations. 2.03 FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES: A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with indicated standards and are reglazable without dismantling of door or sidelight framing, except to extent more specific or more stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of entrance units, and prepare sash for glazing. 1. Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements, and performance standards as shown or specified. B. Provide means of draina a for water and condensation which may accumulate in members of entrance units. C. Weatherstri Provide compression-type weatherstripping at bottom of each door. provide on all other sides of door. 2.04 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE (DOORS AND FRAME FINISHES: A. Fluoropolmer Finish: Minimum thickness of 1.2 mils, color shall be manufacturer's standard Kawneer "Fluropon" or approved equal Kynar 500 finish as selected by Architect. 1. Comply with AAMA 605.2-92 standards. 2.05 HARDWARE: A. General: Hardware for aluminum entrances is specified under BUILDERS HARDWARE, Section 08700 and shall be furnished to the door manufacturer for installation at the factory. Templates of all hardware shall be furnished - to the door manufacturer by the Hardware Contractor. 08410 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Refer to wall sections for basic requirements for installation of entrance units. B. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of entrance units, hardware, operators, and other components of work. C. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. D. Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 sealant sections for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of work. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly without binding, and provide tight fit at contract points at at weatherstripping. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of entrances, exercising care to avoid damage to glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure that entrance units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08410 08410 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of aluminum window unit is shown on drawings. B. Applications of aluminum windows on project include the following: 1. Individuals units set in conventional wall construction (brick/wood stud framing backup). C. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. D. Related Work In Other Section: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Unit Masonry Section 04200 2. Caulking and Sealants Section 07900 3. Aluminum Entrances Section 08410 4. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 1.02 OUALIT Y ASSURANCE: A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for aluminum windows, terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA. 08520 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Manufacturer: 1. Provide aluminum window units where required by manufacture of those upon which drawings are based or by one of the following: Kawneer Co., Inc. Wausau Metals Corp. C. Performance and Testing: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA for type and classification of window units required in each case. D. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate aluminum window units with an integrally concealed low conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior, in a manner which eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use on similar window units for periods of not least than 5 years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. E. Wind Load Construction: Comply with Section 3 "High Performance Specifications for ANSI/AAMA 302.9. 1. Height of window units above grade to centerline area shown on or can be calculated from drawings. Consult Architect for clarification needed to confirm required loading and test pressures. 2. Design wind velocity shall be determined from MAP, AAMA 302.9. 3. Provide additional reinforcement for mullions as may be required to meet wind load construction requirements. 08520 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUA ASSURANCE: (Continued) ixed F. Air Infilt___ration: For window at a static air a difference of 6.24 psf shall comply with ASTM E 283 with the window sash closed and locked. Air infiltration shall not exceed a maximum value of .06 cfm/ft for ash G. Water Resistance: For window ventilators and fixed window units, unit shall comply with ASTM E-331 at a static air pressure difference of 8 psf with the window sash closed and locked. There shall be no water leakage as defined in ASTM E-331. Test shall be completed with and without exterior applied screens. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' specifications, recommee to�ns, and standard details for aluminum window units, including laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Shoy Drawin s: Submit shop drawings,sgale�and fulls a detail sections/oft scale, typical unit elevations at operators, and every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, op other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. C. Ste: Submit samples each required for window minuet finish, on 12" long sections of extrusion shape s as q 1. Architect reserves right to require additional samples which will shown fabrication techniques, workmanship of component parts, and design of hardware and other exposed auxiliary items. D. Testin RWortS: Submit wind loading,type and size window um'tloProgde and water resistance test report certification by manufacturer showing compliance with such tests. 08520 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required, finish, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062" thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. All units shall meet or exceed the requirements of HC50 and shall be designed for 50 psf. Comply with AAMA 803.3. B. Fasteners: aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125" thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. C. Anchors, QM and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 386. D. Sealant: Unless otherwise indicated for sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by window manufacturer for joint size and movement, to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking and non- migrating. Comply with Division 7 section for installation of sealants. 2.02 WINDOW TYPES: A. Project-In: Aluminum window unit shall be 6200T-PI (thermal) as manufactured by Kawneer Window Corp., or equal approved by Architect. Windows shall be of sizes and configurations as called for one the drawings, complete, and fitted with vinyl gasketed glazing beads. Provide all required beads, clips, bolts, anchors, and other items required for complete installations. 08520 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 WINDOW TYPES: (Continued) B. Fixed Windows: Aluminum window unit shall be NuCORE (thermal) as manufactured by Kawneer Corp., or equal approved by Architect. Windows shall be of sizes and configurations as called for one the drawings, complete, and fitted with vinyl gasketed glazing beads. All exterior face members will be seamless. All vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal facedimension of 1-3/4". Provide all required beads, clips, bolts, anchors, and other items required for complete installations. C. Screens: Project-In window units shall be equipped with a single removable insect screen covering the entire window opening. Screen units shall be made of aluminum extruded frames and replaceable 18 X 16 aluminum mesh held securely in frame with vinyl spline. Screen shall be easily removed and replaced without the use of special tools. 2.03 FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES: A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with indicated standards and are reglazable without dismantling of sash framing, except to extent more specific or more stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units, and prepare sash for glazing except where preglazing at factory is indicated. 1. Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. it is intended that similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements, and performance standards as shown or specified. 08520 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES: (Continued) B. Pre lg azed Fabrication: At Contractor's option, preglazed window units at factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section in addition to requirements of ANSI/AAMA 302.9. C. Provide means of drainage for water and condensation which may accumulate in members if window units. D. Weatherstripping: Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash, except provide sliding weatherstripping at all locations where sash rails slide horizontally or vertically along frame of units. E. Hardware: Hardware having component parts which are exposed shall be of aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material(s) and of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 2.04 ALUMINUM WINDOW FINISHES: A. Fluoropolmer Finish: Minimum thickness of 1.2 mils, color shall be manufacturer's standard Kawneer "Fluropon" or approved equal Kynar 500 finish as selected by Architect. 1. Comply with AAMA 605.2-92 standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Refer to wall sections for basic requirements for installation of window units. B. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of work. C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. 08520 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSTALLATION: (Continued) D. Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 sealant sections for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of work. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows; comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. D. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure that window units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08520 08520 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08700 - BUILDERS HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: "Builders Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. Types of items in this section include (but are not necessarily limited to): Hinges Lock Cylinders and Keys Lock and Latchsets Exit Devices Closers Weatherstripping Threshold Bolts and Stops B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Wood Doors Section 08210 2. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 3. Steel Doors and Frames Section 08100 4. Aluminum Entrances Section 08410 5. Painting Section 09900 08700 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Finish Hardware will be furnished by the Hardware Supplier to the Contractor. The materials and installation information given below is to allow the Contractor to determine the extent of installation work required which shall be a part of his bid. 1.02 UO ALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employes, an experienced hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Purchaser, Architect and Contractor. C. Fire-Rated enin s: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. 1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Hardware for use on labeled openings shall conform to requirements of National Board of Fire Underwriters and Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. B. American National Standards Institute: "Designations for Builder's Hardware". C. "Rules and Regulations of the Architectural Barriers Board". D. GSA Accessibility Standards. E. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Standards. 08700 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer technical information for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. Transmit copy of applicable data to Installer. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of work. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on builders hardware indicated, organized hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc., contained in schedule. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by builders hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Include a separate detailed schedule indicating clearly show the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled. C. Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of builders hardware, submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable an remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. 08700 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 PRODUCT HAN G A. Pac of hardware: on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort anmorep identical in may be packed in ththe hardware set number. Two 0 same container. B. Invento hardware: jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct. C. Pr= secure lock-u : for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation om completion hardware the work will not of be not immediately replaceable, so that P delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Take each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. B. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to conform that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of hardware. PART 2 - PROS S 2.01 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: A. Requirements: for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of builders hardware is indicated in the Builders Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. 08700 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: (Continued) B. Manufacturers: Hinges: Stanley, Hager Locks and Cylinders: Schlage Door Closers: LCN Exit Devices: Sargent Bolts: Ives Stops: Ives Gaskets/Thresholds: National Guard 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. Hand of door: The drawings shown the direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door movement as shown. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF-H106, FS FF-G-11, FS FF-H-116 AND FS FF-H-121. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. F. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of builders hardware. 08700 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 HINGES: A. Number of hinges per door: two hinges are to be provided for doors up to and including five feet (5') in height, and an additional hinge for each additional one and one half feet (1-1/2'), or fraction thereof, in the height of the door. B. All hinges for exterior doors shall be Stanley FBB 191 NRP Series. C. Hinges for interior doors shall be sized as follows: Door Door Hinge Thickness Width Hinge Weight Height 1-3/4" 41" & Under Regular Weight 4 1/2" 2-Ball Bearing 1-3/4" Over 41" Extra Heavy Wt. 4 1/2" 4-Ball Bearing Width of hinge shall be determined by trim conditions. D. All ball-bearing hinges shall have flush bearings and button tips. E. Hinges are to be of five-knuckle design, equipped with full jewel radius thrust bearing assemblies. The bearing assemblies are to be permanently lubricated and sealed. The bearing balls are to be of chrome alloy material, through hardened. All hinges are to have positive non-rising pins. F. Hinges are to be Stanley FBB 179 Series. 2.04 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS: A. Locksets and latchsets shall be "medium duty" cylindrical type, with steel cases and forged brass fronts that are adjustable front flat to beveled. Locks shall have antifriction (hinged type) latchbolts with a minimum throw of 3/4". Locks shall have balanced hub construction. Locksets and latchsets with rosette trim shall be Schlage " S " Series except for Doors 100, 101, 104, 115, 115A (Alternate No. 2), and 115B (Alternate No. 2). B. Provide keyed cylinders for all locking devices specified herein and as noted in other paragraphs. C. Lockset and latchset design to have Schlage "Saturn" lever handles. 08700 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. All cores to be removable. E. All locks to be masterkeyed. F. Provide knurled or roughened surface on lever handles to give tactile warning to doors opening into hazardous areas such as electrical and mechanical rooms. 2.05 MORTISE LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS: A. Locksets and latchsets shall be "heavy duty" mortise type, with steel cases and forged brass fronts that are adjustable front flat to beveled. Locks shall have antifriction (hinged type) latchbolts with a minimum throw of 3/4". Locks shall have balanced hub construction. Locksets and latchsets with rosette trim shall be Schlage " L 9010" Series. B. Provide keyed cylinders for all locking devices specified herein and as noted in other paragraphs. C. Lockset and latchset design to have Schlage "73" lever handles. D. All cores to be removable. E. All locks to be masterkeyed. 2.06 CLOSERS: A. Closers for outswinging exterior doors and interior doors shall be LCN 1460 Series. B. Mount closers on room side. C. All closers shall have adjustable spring power. D. All parallel-arm closers shall have adjustable hydraulic back-check at 87 0 . Provide at Reverse Bevel conditions. E. Magnetic hold-open closers shall be LCN 4040 SE closers. 08700 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.07 EXIT DEVICES: A. All exit devices shall be Sargent "S8700" Touchbar Series. B. Exit devices shall be mortise type with standard trim piece. 2.08 DOOR STOPS (INTERIOR DOORS): A. Furnish one wall stop for each new door. Wall stops shall be furnished where practical and where conditions allow. (Blocking to be provided by other Sections). Floor stops may be supplied where wall stops cannot be used. C. Stops shall be Ives Division's 407B3, 436B3, 438B3, x 435 where required. 2.09 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS: A. Weatherstripping shall be National Guard 5050 at head and jambs, and 421B at door bottoms. B. Thresholds shall be National Guard rabbeted saddle type (424) or panic type (896) with neoprene seal thresholds as required. C. Drips to be National Guard #15DB. D. Astragal shall be National Guard #143PB. E. Door Bottom Seals shall be National Guard 202NB. 2.10 DOOR PULLS A. Door Pulls shall be Rockw000d #150. 2.11 FLUSH BOLTS: A. Flush bolts shall be Ives #262. 2.12 SILENCERS: A. Silencers shall be National Guard #20 for metal frames. 08700 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES: A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. 1. All butts, locksets, latchsets, bolts, stops, cylinders, etc., shall be bright brass, US26D, finish. 2. Door closers shall be painted as directed by Architect. 2.14 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. The following hardware sets are to be used as a guide for installation. HW - 1 Butts 1 Latchset 1 Dummy Trim 2 Exit Device 2 Closers, Electrical Hold-Open 1 Astragal 1 Coordinator 2 Stops 6 Silencers HW - 2 Butts 1 Lockset Storeroom Function 1 Stop 3 Silencers 08700 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.14 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: (Continued) HW - 3 ----------------------- Butts 1 Trim Lockset 1 Door Pull 1 Closer 1 Exit Device Weatherstripping 1 Threshold 1 Door Bottom Seal HW - 4 Butts 1 Latchset, Electrical Hold-Open 1 Closer 1 Stop 3 Silencers HW - 5 ----------------------- Butts 1 Lockset Storeroom Function 1 Dummy Trim (outside of inactive door) 1 Flush Bolt 2 Stop 6 Silencers HW - 6 ----------------------- Butts 1 Latchset 1 Closer 1 Stop 3 Silencers 08700 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts HW - 7 ----------------------- Butts 1 Lockset Classroom Function 1 Closer 1 Stop 3 Silencers HW - 8 ----------------------- Butts 1 Trim Lockset 2 Door Pull 2 Exit Device Weatherstripping 1 Astragral 1 Coordinator 1 Threshold 2 Door Bottom Seal 2 Closers HW - 9 Butts 1 Latchset 1 Dummy True 2 Exit Device 2 Closers, Electrical Hold-Open 1 Astragal 1 Coordinator 2 Stops 6 Silencers HW - 10 Butts 1 Latchset 1 Dummy Trim (outside of inactive door) 2 Exit Device 2 Closers 1 Astragal 1 Coordinator 2 Stops 6 Silencers 08700 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.14 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: (Continued) HW - 11 ----------------------- Butts 1 Latchset 3 Silencers HW - 12 Butts 1 Lockset Entrance Function Weatherstripping 1 Threshold 1 Door Bottom Seal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, handicapped codes, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware into or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate remove, protections with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 08700 - 12 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and clean each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the hardware supplier shall return to the project and readjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Purchaser's Personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. C. The hardware supplier shall notify the hardware manufacturer and the Architect of any problems that might require the manufacturer's assistance. END OF SECTION 08700. 08700 13 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definitions: "Glass" includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass products. "Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass. Types of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, glass and glazing for: 1. Window units, not indicated as "preglazed". 2. Entrances and other exterior doors, not indicated as "preglazed". 3. Interior partitions and doors and miscellaneous interior glazing. B. Glass Products: is hereby defined to include glazing products. C. Packaged mirror units: are specified as "specialities" in another section. D. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. E. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Caulking, Section 07900. 2. Glazing Beads for Aluminum Windows, Section 08520. 3. Glazing beads for Wood Doors, Section 08210. 4. Metal gazing beads for metal doors and frames, Section 08100. 5. Glazing of factory glazed items, under the various appropriate sections. 6. Glazing beads for Aluminum Entrances, Section 08410. 08800 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 UO ALITY ASSURANCE: A. Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattern of glass: ASG Industries, Inc. C-E Glass Division Ford Glass Company Libbey-Owens-Ford Company PPG Industries, Inc. B. Glazing Material Manufacturer: Tremco Manufacturing Co. Pecora Chemical Corporation Interchemical Presstite Co. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Polished wire glass, where shown on the Drawings, shall be in compliance with ANSI Z97.1-1972. as eligible for use in hazardous locations as defined by applicable cods and state laws. Wired glass shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as fire retardant. 2. Tempered glass, shall be in compliance with ANSI Standard Z97.1 for safety glazing materials. 3. Conform to applicable requirements of Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201) by Consumer Product Safety Commission effective July 6, 1977. D. Glass shall be of domestic manufacture, of thickness and quality specified herein. Labels shall remain on glass until final cleaning. E. When glass is not cut to size by the manufacturer but is furnished from local stock, the Glass and Glazing Subcontractor shall submit an affidavit stating that strength, grade, thickness, type, quality and manufacture of the glass furnished. F. All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability and appearance, and shall be shipped in unbroken containers clearly marked with name and type of product. All glass shall be free from bubbles, pockets, chips or other defects. 08800 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Glass Glass Marketing Association: "Glazing Manual", 1471, and Glazing, Sealing System Manual. B. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., Technical Report 104C. C. ANSI Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. D. ASTM D2240-Test for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. E. ASTM C 1036-90 Standard Specification for Flat Glass. F. F.S.-TT-S-230-Sealing Compound, Synthetic rubber Base Single Component, Chemically Curing for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit 2 samples, 12" square, of each glass product, except for clear single-pane units and two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Pre-Installation: Meet with Glazer and other trades affected by glass installation, prior to beginning of installation. Do not perform work under adverse weather or job conditions. Install liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTY: A. Warran on Hermetic Seals: Provide insulating glass manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to, within specified warranty period, furnish FOB project site, replacement units for insulating glass units which have defective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage); defined to include intrusion of moisture or dirt, internal condensation at temperatures above - 20oF (-310C), deterioration of internal glass coatings, and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance handling, provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been adhered to during warranty period. Warranty period is 10 years after seal date permanently imprinted on unit, but not less than 9 years after date of substantial completion. 08800 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Float/Plate Glass: Type I, Quality q3, clear unless otherwise indicated. Size: 1/4" thick unless otherwise indicated. B. Polished Wired Glass: Type III, Kind A., Form 1, Quality qll, clear and polished both faces. Size: 1/4" thick. Mesh: Type m3, square. Fire Rating: Provide glass listed and labeled by UL for "fire resistance". Installation: Install with mesh pattern square with respect to frame. C. Tempered Glass: Provide prime glass of color and type indicated, which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength. Size: 1/4" thick unless otherwise indicated. Tong Marks: Where indicated as "Free of Tong Marks", provide tempered glass produced by manufacturer's special process which eliminates tong marks. Installation: Install at all locations whose nearest vertical edge is within 48" of a door. Install at all locations less than 18" above finished door. D. Low-E Glass: Provide 2 sheets of glass as follows, and 1/2" dry air or gas- filled space with -20OF (-290C) dew point, with Class A sealant-type edge construction to maintain a hermetic seal; fabricated to provide the following overall performance characteristics: Exterior Glass: Heat-strengthened LOF Evergreen Glass, Quality q3, 1/4" thick. Interior Glass: Energy Advantage Low E Glass, Quality q3, 1/4" thick, pyrolytic coating on #3 surface. Manufacturer: Libbey Owens Ford, Toledo, Ohio. 08800 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS: (Continued) Edge Construction: Twin primary sealants of polysobutylene; tubular aluminum or galvanized steel space-bar frame with welded or soldered sealed corners, and filled with desiccant; and secondary seal outside of bar, bonded to both sheets of glass and bar, of polysulfide, silicone or hot-melt butyl elastometric sealant (fabricator's option). Required Performance: 54% daylight transmittance, 24% solar transmittance, 15% UV transmittance, 12% daylight reflection, 6% solar reflection, and U-value of 0.39 for summer and .035 for winter at night. Warran : Provide manufacturer's standard 10 years product warranty on coating. 2.02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color, or black if not color is so selected. Comply with manufacturer' recommendations for selection of hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials and variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation. 1. 1-Part Pol sulfide Glazing Sealant: Polysulfide elastometric sealant complying with FS TT-S-00230, Glass A, Type II; compounded specifically for exterior exposed glazing. 2. Acrylic-Emulsion Glazing Sealant: Emulsion of acrylic, with or without latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing; nonhardening, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. 3. Elastic Glazing Compound: Knife grade, wood or metal type, as required, meeting Federal Specification TT-G0041C, "Tremglaze" by Tremco Manufacturing Company, "M-242" or "M-251" by Pecora, "Elastic Glazing Compound" by Kuhls, or as approved by Architect. 08800 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS: (Continued) 4. Glazing Type: Polysobutylene type, at least 1/8" thick, "Tremco 440" by Tremco Manufacturing Company or equal by Pecora, Presstite Products or as approved by Architect. Color shall be black, bronze, white, gray, or manufacturer' standard colors as selected by Architect. 5. Clear Glazing Sealant: For butt glazed glass shall be clear silicone sealant by General Electric, Dow or Rhodia. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIAL: A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. C. Spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, 40-50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with sealants used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE: A. Watertight and airtight installation: of each glass product is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must with standard normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and air tight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with significant edge damage or other imperfections. C. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bit on glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. 08800 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE: (Continued) D. Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated. E. Install insulating glass units to comply with recommendations by Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association, except as otherwise specifically indicated or recommended by glass and sealant manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING: A. Clean lg azing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastometric sealants are used. B. Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING: A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one-fourth of glass width from each comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. D. All glass shall be clean cut nipping to remove flares or to remove flares or to reduce oversize dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be ship-cut to fit openings allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be perfectly square. Any out of square shall be reported and corrected before glass is sized. Protect edges of glass from abrasion with ground or masonry. 08800 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING: (Continued) E. Cut glass accurately to fit openings sizes of glass indicated on the drawings are approximate only, and the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required clearance and bite around full perimeter of glass, as set forth in the FGMA Manual. F. All interior glass shall be set by "channel glazing method. Special glass shall e set in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as detailed. G. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in sill channels), except as otherwise indicated, and depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations. H. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "Wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. I. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. J. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. 3.04 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. All glass shall be protected from damage until acceptance of the building and if broken, or defective, shall be removed and replaced with glass of specified type. Subcontractor shall protect and replace glass until his work is completed. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of glass after glazing work is completed. B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. 08800 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING: (Continued) C. Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each day's work. Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surface as the work progresses. D. At the completion of the entire job, but not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish the date of substantial completion in each area of project, Contractor shall have all glass surfaces thoroughly cleaned and washed by professional window cleaners. END OF SECTION 08800 08800 - 9 4/2/97 J J U) Y F- F- > > O O w U U Qe Q Q r F- m m m m m r U U a a a a a r (7 C 7 C 7 C 7 (7 p p 6 6 6 ❑ ❑ ❑ }, m m o m o 0 6 o m m m m m m m m Q a c: �' a ►- F- F- a a a a a a a n C7 > } °- } a a a a (L z O O X O X X X X O O Q G (D C7 C7 Q U O C7 (7 '� ❑ ❑ O O O O O O 0 F- D p O w F- F- a ►- a a a F- U U ►- U X X F- F- F- X X F- U a a w a w w w w a Q Q a Q w w a a a w w a a a F- 0- mama ~ X X X X X co O 0 0 0 0 p ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ F- F- a F- a a a a F- F- F- F- F- X F- F- X X F- CL a w a w w w w m a a a a w a a a a w w a a n F- mama ❑ ❑ O ❑ O O O O ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ p p O p p p p p p p Q F- F- a F- a a m a F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- X F- F- F- w a a w n. w w w w a m n. a a a a a a a a w a s n. m ammo O 0 o ❑ O o o O ❑❑ a a p 0 p ❑ ❑ p ❑ m F- m m a a F- F- F- F- F- X F- F- F- F- X F- F- F- Cl) a a w a w w w w m a m a a w a a a a w a a a a m mmam y } } } } } Q � ❑ p 0 p 0 0 0 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ a p p ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ O F- F- m F- a a m a F- F- F- F- F- X X F- F- F- X X F- F- F- I Z a a w a w w w w a a 1 a a I m W W a m a w W a a n. J J } } W J J J J J J J J J J J > J J J J Z 6 J J J a z z z z z z z z zF- z z X z z z z X X z z z m > > > > > > > U > > U > > w > > > > w w > > > z z z z oC > > > > m U U F- w w cn m m U > > U U U w w U > > U U u. > > m > m w F- w = 0 0 o J 2 2 o °C N W O O U O- O 0 U U J p Z aC o= w w C7 m � w w m m m 0 m m co O m D= m O 0 z z = O O (7 OC (7 O oC O O C7 O W w z z Q Q > _ Ne Q w ❑ Z (7 Z p Q w z ❑ z ❑ O = O 2 w w m m w U = z m H z H ►_ m > O f) m z w w W H Q w O p w > w 0 Q _5 w w p w p oc N in cn m Y ❑ cn cn U _i U -, U m U U ui o C ' O N M It LO (O I, 00 W O N CO tt CC7 CO I, 00 0) Q N � 0 Z O O O O O O O O O O NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted of the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of Massachusetts General Laws C. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered Al through A9 inclusive. E. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes touse to perform the following classes of work on part therof and the bid price therefor, CLASS OF WORK REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS None Required F. In any case in which the Sub-bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the class of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB- BID, but not his bid price. 09250 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Types of work include: 1. Gypsum drywall 2. Drywall finishing (joint tape-and-compound treatment). 3. Texture Spray Finish B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Painting Section 09900 2. Insulation Section 07200 3. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 4. Finished Carpentry Section 06200 5. Access Doors Section 08305 1.03 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated or are required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installation identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including U.S. and A.I.A. 1. Comply with FM "Approval Guide" where applicable. B. Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturer's recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. C. Installer: All drywall work shall be performed by skilled workmen in the trade and shall meet all requirements as herein specified. This subcontractor shall be held strictly responsible for result of the highest quality work. Unsound and unsightly work shall be removed and replaced by work satisfactory to the Architect, without additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 REFERENCES: A. Gypsum Board Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 840 with application and finishing of gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated. 09250 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 REFERENCES: (Continued) B. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA-505 by Gypsum Association. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Deliver, identifv store and rp otect gypsum drywall materials to comply with referenced standards. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Installer must examine the substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum drywall, and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be installed; and shall notify the contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55 degrees F., for the period of 24 hours before drywall finishing during installation and until compounds are dry. C. Installation shall not be started until windows are installed and exterior doors are installed unless openings are temporarily closed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Gypsum Board and Related Products: The Celotex Corporation Georgia-Pacific Corp. Gold Bond Bldg. Products Div., National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co. 09250 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: (Continued) Texture S Xray Finish: Gold Bond Bldg. Products Div., National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD: A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, of types, edge configuration and thickness indicated; in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. Type: Type X. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. Thickness: 5/8", except where otherwise indicated. B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 630, with tapered edges of type and thickness indicated; in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to- end butt joint. Use at kitchen #123(walls and ceiling), hall #126, laundry #127, toilet rooms, janitor's closet, and other "wet" areas such as directly behind sink units in classrooms. Coal all raw, field-cut edges with manufacturer's approved water resistant adhesive. Tyne: Type X. Thickness: 5/8", except where otherwise indicated. 2.03 TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim-beads, U-type edge trim bards, special L-kerf-type edge trim-beads, and one-piece control joint breads. 1. Corner Bead: 1-1/8" x 1-1/8" galvanized steel with perforated edges. 2. Casing Bead: No. 200 galvanized steel for finishing with joint compound at junction of wallboard and dissimilar materials ,except wood finish and at all exposed edges. At junction of wallboard and wood finish, use No. 100VB with factory applied 3/8" x 2/8" vinyl foam gasket. 09250 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Joint ' e: Perforated type. 2. Joint Compound: Ready-mixed vinyl-type for interior use. a. Grade: 2 separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. 3. Water-Resistant Joint Compound: Special water-resistant type for treatment of joints, fastener heads and cut edges of water-resistant backing board. Available Product: Sheetrock Brand W/R Compound; United States Gypsum Co. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board. 1. Fastening Adhesive: (for wood): ASTM C 557. 2. Gypsum Board Screws: Comply with ASTM C 646. 3. Gypsum Board Nails: Comply with ASTM C 514. Use 17/8" 6d 13ga 1/4" diamond head or dished head drywall nails. 2.06 TEXTURE SPRAY FINISH: A. Aggregated non-asbestos power formula, medium-fine to fine texture, white color, equal to "Imperial QT (fine)" by United States Gypsum, "Spray-Quick (medium-fine)" by Gold Bond Products, or approved equal. 09250 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Pre-Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. B. Install ceiling insulation blankets as indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installable after board has been installed. C. Located exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than V-0" in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least V-0". E. Install wall/ artition boards vertically to avoid end-butt joints wherever possible. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. G. Located either edge or end joints over support, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that both tapered edge joints abut, and mill-cut or field-cut end joints abut. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. 09250 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:(Continued) I. Form Control Joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards. prepared to receive the accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, but in no case greater than every 30 feet. J. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board with "floating" internal comer construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated, unless control of expansion joints are indicated, or unless fire rating is indicated. K. S ace fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. L. Furnish and install metal stud framing or wood blocking required for the support of access panels. Provide opening and install all access panels furnished under other sections for drywall construction. Do all required patching of drywall construction. 3.02 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION: A. Single-Layer &r)lication: Install exposed gypsum board. 1. On Ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2. On Partitions/Walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize joints. 09250 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION: (Continued) B. Sin lg e-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1. Fasten all wallboard by means of power-drive 1 1/4" Type W drywall screws, located not over 16" o.c. for wall and 12" o.c. for ceilings, or nails spaced at 8"o.c. for walls and 7"o.c. for ceilings. Fire rated wallboard shall be fastened in manner which provides the necessary fire rating. Stagger fasteners in adjacent sheets on opposite sides of joints. Depress fastener heads slightly below surface of the wallboard. Use screws long enough to penetrate wood 3/4" . Do not drive fasteners closer than 3/4" from edges and end of the board. C. Fire-rated Ceiling Installation Method: Install FR-Quik Channel Sets and Bond Washers as manufactured by Lumbermate, St. Louis, MO. Channels Sets are made of minimum No. 28 MSG galvanized steel with minimum 33,000 psi yield strength, 1-1/4" X 5/8" with sleeve ends permitted channels to move lengthwise for adjustment. Washers are 1-1/4" diameter with a center hole formed to match bugle head drywall screws and surrounding holes for finish compound adhesion to gypsum wallboard. 1. Gypsum wallboard sheets (installed perpendicular to trusses) shall have Channel Sets installed at ceiling wallboard edges centered lengthwise over the wallboard joints. Secure to trusses with one 1 inch drywall screw at each end. 2. Install 5/8" Type X gypsum wallboard with long dimension perpendicular to trusses. Stagger end joints in centerline of truss bottom chords. Directly secure with 1-5/8" long drywall screws on 8" centers. Secure to channel sets with bond washers and Type S, 1" long screws on 8" centers driven through the crease between adjacent gypsum boards. 3. Paper tape embedded in cementious compound over joints with edges of compound feathered out and exposed screw heads covered with compound. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer' instructions and recommendations. 09250 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi-finishing type is indicated. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including expansion joints). 3.04 FINISHING OF DRYWALL: A. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges, trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefnll open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. 1. Avnly joint tave at joints between gypsum boards, except where a trim accessory is indicated. 2. Annly joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between last 2 coasts and after last coat. Allow compound to dry thoroughly, a minimum of 24 hours between coats. B. Water-Resistant Gwsum Board Base: 1. Treat fastener head and embed tape as indicated above using water- resistant joint compound but finish with 2 coats of joint compounds used for regular gypsum board work. B. All edges and corners shall be left square, all surfaces plane, plug, straight, and true and ready for painting or other finish. C. Refer to sections on painting and coatings in Division 9 for finishes to be applied to drywall work. 3.05 INSPECTION OF DRYWALL RECEIVING TEXTURE SPRAY FINISH: A. Applicator must examine ceiling areas and conditions under which work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator. 09250 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Starting of work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not apply over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. D. Drop cloths, building paper, and other protective measures shall be used to protect adjacent work, machinery, equipment and apparatus from damage of defacement. Damage and defacement shall be repaired in an approved manner at not additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 1. Depending upon item, Contractor and/or Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing Subcontractors shall remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finished-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, Contractor who removed item shall reinstall. 2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. 3.07 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. Mix and prepare materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary ,strin materials before using. Materials shall be applied without the addition of any ingredients and without reducing or thinning except as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect. 09250 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.08 APPLICATION: A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting of loss of adhesion of the undercoat. No painter's finish shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, and in no case in less than two (2) days. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than between 30-50 SF per gallon. D. Prime Coat: Apply first coat of alkyd flat wall paint or good quality primer- sealer over entire surface. 1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. E. Final Coat: Apply textured spray finish as per manufacturer's instructions. G. Completed Work: Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 09250 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.09 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION: A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finish work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. END OF SECTION 09250 09250 - 12 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings on drawings and finish schedule. 1. The reflected ceiling plans are intended for ceiling layout purposes only. 2. The finish schedule, included in the specifications shall be used to designate the ceiling finish in each space. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: 1. Acoustical Panel Ceilings, Exposed Suspension. D. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Light fixtures, diffusers or other mechanical or electrical items within ceilings together with suspension system for same. Division 15 or 16 as applicable. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer: Firm with not less than three years of successful experience installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. 09510 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Desijn Criteria: All acoustical tile shall conform to Federal Specification SS-S-1 18A, Class 25, Type III or IV and comply with FM requirements for a Class I, flame spread rating of 25 or less. C. Design Criteria: Suspension system shall conform to ASTM Standard C635 and installation shall be in accordance with ASTM Recommended Practice C636. 1.03 REFERENCES: A. Acoustical Materials Association. Installation Recommendations. B. FF-SS-S-118B Sound Controlling Blocks and Boards (Acoustical Tiles and Panels, Prefabricated). C. ASTM C 423 Test for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials in Reverberation Rooms. D. ASTM C 635 Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. E. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical tile and Lay-in Panels. F. ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. 1. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances. B. Samples: Set of 12" square samples for each acoustical unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work, and set of 12" long samples of each exposed runner and molding. 09510 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 SUBMITTALS: (Continued) C. Maintenance Stock: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance material to Purchaser. Furnish full size units matching units installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels equal to 1.0% of acoustical units and exposed suspension installed. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in space completed and nominal dry, and until work above ceilings completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING UNITS: A. Acoustical Panels: General: Provide manufacturer's standard lay-in panels of type recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Provide sizes shown by reflected ceiling plans or in the finish schedule. 1. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Panels: Provide units not less than 3/4" thick and of density not less than 10 lbs. per cubic foot; NRC 0.50 to 0.60, STC 40-44, light reflection over 75%. a. Product: U.S. Gypsum Interiors, Inc. Auratone "Illusion Square Two/24" 15/16" routing Omni Fissured 3575 or products of equal design pattern and acoustical properties by one of the following manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries Celotex Corporation Conwed Corporation b. Size: 2 x 4 shadowline tapered. C. Color: White 09510 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS: General: Comply with ASTM C 635, as applicable to type of suspension systems required for type of ceiling units indicated. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition system (if any). A. Suspension Sys tem for Lay-In Acoustical Panels: 1. Provide standard exposed "Tee" system of intermediate-duty grade. Finish shall be manufacturer's standard matte white enamel. a. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements include the following: Donn Products Corporation "DX" 15/16" grid suspension system or equal as manufactured by: Eastern Products Armstrong Building Products National Rolling Mills. 2. Include all components normally furnished as parts of suspension systems, such s main tees, cross tees, splices, angle or channel wall moldings, wire, clips, etc. Area above suspended ceiling shall be completely accessible by lifting out lay-in tile. 3. All carrying sections, channels, angles, splices, special members and accessories shall be steel. Exposed members shall be fabricated of .024 electro-galvanized steel, and shop painted with low sheen, satin white, baked enamel finish. 4. Main tee runners shall be 15/16" x 1-1/2" equal to Donn Ceiling Suspension System DXT 24. Provide connectors and splice plates to join ends of main tee runners. Cross tees shall be 15/16" x 1-1/2" equal to Donn DXT 424, 48" o.c, perpendicular to main tee runners. All tee flanges shall a in the same plane, and carefully cut to butt squarely and tightly. 5. Suspension systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to limit deflections to not more than 1/360 of span between hangers. 09510 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALS: (Continued) 6. Hanger Anchors: Shall be suitable expansion-type or power-driven eyepins of sufficient capacity for purpose intended, subject to Architect's approval. Hangers shall be No. 12 galvanized soft annealed steel wire. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Tile Joint Splines: Type recommended by tile manufacturer to coordinate with tile installation support system and installation procedure. B. Edge Trim Molding: Metal or extruded PVC plastic, of types and profiles indicated, white finish unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. 3.03 INSTALLATION: General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and industry standards applicable to work. A. Arran a acoustical units and orient directionally - patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. Install tile with pattern running in one direction, parallel to axis chosen by the Architect. 09510 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 INSTALLATION: (Continued) B. Install suspensionsystems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-typing, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. C. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension systems to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter comers accurately and connect securely. D. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with that of other trades. Readjust ceiling suspension after installation of mechanical and electrical equipment and fixtures by the respective trades. Provide edge trim or suspension where required at mechanical or electrical work. 2. Tile shall be cut 2& to fit edge condition, light outlets, and built-in elements on the ceiling. Such cutting shall be minimized and care shall be taken to prevent marring tile edges and finish. E. Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension systems. Place splines or flanges of suspension system into kerfed edges, or insert tile tongues into tile grooves, so that every tile-to-tile joint is closed by double lap of material. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints, scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and around penetrating work. 09510 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. B. Remove all cartons, containers, and waste materials from the premises as they accumulate. Upon completion, remove all surplus materials from building. END OF SECTION 09510 09510 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules and generally includes: 1. Vinyl tile floors 2. Sheet vinyl floors 3. Vinyl cove base 4. Vinyl or rubber reducer strip where resilient tile joints other flooring material. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Protection of finished floors. 2. Level and even concrete floor slabs. 3. Cabinets and Casework, Section 06200. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants, and leveling compounds. 1. Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. 09650 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring, including accessories, required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full-size tile units, 6" x 9" samples of sheet flooring, and 2-1/2" long sections of resilient flooring accessories. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices of each type of flooring and accessory required. D. Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site replacement materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows: 1. Tile Flooring, not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, size, and color installed. 2. Sheet Flooring, not less than 5% for each type, pattern, and color installed. 3. Base, not less than 20 feet of each type, size, and color installed. Adhesive not less than amount necessary to apply the above material. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 650F (190C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 550F (130C) in areas where work is completed. B. Install resilient floorine accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 09650 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: (Continued) C. High spots shall be leveled by grinding and lower areas shall be filled only with latex type underlayments. 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile: (VCT) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Multicolor Premium Excelon Series" Kentile Floors, Inc. "Criteron" Azrock Corporation, Floor Products Division "Cortina Series" Tarco Eastern Inc. Tarkett "Expression Series" 2. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: (SV) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. "Classic Corlon Suffield and/or Seagate Series Tarco Eastern Inc. Tarkett "Response Series" 09650 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: (Continued) 3. Wall Base: Armstrong World Industries Azrock Floor Products Johnson Rubber Co., Flooring Accessories Div. Kentile Floors, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Colors and Patterns: As shown or schedule, or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. The Architect reserves the right to vary the colors and patterns from room to room as well as within the rooms. In particular, a floor pattern will be developed for the Meeting Rooms 100 and 101. B. Vivl Composition Tile Flooring: Provide Vinyl Composition Tile, FS SS- T0312, Type IV, 12' x 12" unless otherwise indicated. Composition 1 - asbestos-free, 1/8" gage. C. Vyl Sheet Flooring with Backing SSW Provide vinyl sheet with filled vinyl plastic wear layer and fibrous backing complying with FS 1-F-475, Type II, and with RFCI SV-1. Type I, Material I wear layer, Group III backing suitable for Use Category I, with a recommended static load limit of 100 psi, 72" minimum sheet width. D. Accessories: 1. Wall Base: Provide base complying with FS SS-W-40; either Type I rubber or Type II vinyl, with matching end stops and preformed or molded comer units, and as follows: Hei ht: 4° Thickness: 1/8" gage. Thickness: 0.080" gage. Style: Standard top-set cove at resilent tile and sheet vinyl floor areas. Finish: Color to be selected by Architect. 09650 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: (Continued) 2. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1" wide. 4. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 5. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 6. Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Broom Clean or Vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. 1. Use leveling compound or crack filler as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors. 2. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete slabs if requested by Architect, to determine that concrete surface are sufficiently cured, dried and ready to receive flooring. 3. AWly concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 09650 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 2. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 3. Tightly cement flooring to sub-base without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. B. Tile Floors: 1. 1:& the from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 2. Match tiles for color and ap ttern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. Lay tile with grain running in one direction. 3. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. C. Sheet Flooring: 1. 1:,ay Sheet flooring to provide as few seam as possible with economical use of materials. Do not permit seams to fall in front of main traffic areas such as door openings and exitways. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Adhere sheet floorin g to substrates using method approved by flooring manufacturer for type of sheet flooring and substrate condition indicated. 09650 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 INSTALLATION: (Continued) 3. Prepare seams in vinyl sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for most inconspicuous appearance, sealing continuously with fluid-applied sealant or adhesive as standard with manufacturer. 4. Where different color of resilient flooring occur in adjoining rooms or areas, and no threshold or metal dividing strips is called for, install feature strips under door or across center of doorless opening, of color selected by Architect. 5. Fit flooring neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases and thresholds, and around pipes, columns, and other projections. Cut, fit, and scribe borders with application of field tile. D. Accessories: 1. Annly wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed comer units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. a. Provide base at all built-in work including new cabinets where shown or required. 2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 3. Install edge strips where resilient flooring materials terminate at points higher than contiguous finished flooring. 09650 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Remove ga excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. B. Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. C. Protection: Provide protective covering over complete surfaces. END OF SECTION 09650 09650 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09680 - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of each type of carpeting is indicated on the drawings, and by specifications, and is defined to include carpet, adhesive and accessories. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work as included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Resilient Flooring and Coved Base - Section 09650. 2. Broom cleaning of floors will be the responsible of the Contractor. The Carpet Subcontractor shall remove all wax, oil, grease, shellac, paint or other extraneous matter and prepare floors to the satisfactory condition to receive carpet. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer: Firm with not less than 2 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. 09680 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 UQ ALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Manufacturer: Firm (carpet mill) with not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicated compliance of products with requirements of this section. C. General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by the Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. Applicable requirements as set forth in accordance with ASTM Standards on Textile Materials prepared by ASTM Committee D-13 shall apply to the standards established herein. All testing for shrinkage, moth repellency, seam strength and flame resistance shall meet or exceed testing procedures and end limits as described in ASTM DDD-C-95 and shall conform to fire-hazard classification requirements of applicable Federal, State and local laws as codes and in accordance with requirements of FHA "Minimum Property Standards" regarding wearing characteristics (high traffic), mold resistance, and larvae resistance. D. Reguirements of Re lgu atory Agencies: 1. Carpeting materials and carpet installations shall conform to the applicable requirements of all local, municipal, state federal or other agencies whose codes, laws, rules, ordinances and regulations have jurisdiction over such work. 2. Contractor's attention is specifically directed to flammability, smoke contribution and electrostatic above. He shall check out all materials and methods and be responsible for verification of compliance with same. 3. All carpet materials and the installation thereof shall conform with the following requirements of the National Bureau of Standards of Flooring Radiant Panel Test NBSIR 75-950: High Hazard Areas: Incapacitated or Restrained Personnel - .45 or higher. Sprinkler Areas: .22 or higher. Other Areas: .22 or higher. 09680 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with the provision of the General Conditions. 2. Drawings shall show carpet layout and seam locations. Indicate direction of carpet in all areas, direction of carpet pile being uniform throughout. Show edge details on Shop Drawings. Provide accessory manufacturer's standard cuts showing same. B. Samples: Submit 18" x 18" samples of each carpet required, and 6" lengths of exposed edge stripping, and 6" square of separate cushions. C. Product Data: In addition to complete data on each carpet and carpeting material, provide manufacturer's certification of certified test laboratory reports for required compliances with specified tests, and provide written instructions for each type of installation required. Submit documentation that carpet and adhesive have been tested and have passed emissions guidelines established in conjunction with CRI and EPA. D. Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site an additional 5% replacement material from same manufactured lot as materials installed. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: A. Install no work when conditions of temperature and/or moisture on materials or substrates are not in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommended conditions for installation. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. 09680 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.06 WARRANTY: A. Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer (Carpet Mill), agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 2-year warranty period following substantial completion. Attach copies of product warranties. B. Additionally, this Subcontractor shall, at his own expense and upon written notice from the Architect, promptly and properly replace any and all improper work and materials that may become apparent within 12 months after final approval as evidenced by the date of the final certificate. Warning is hereby given that strict adherence of this specification will be required and that his subcontractor shall receive no additional compensation for loss in replacement of goods disapproved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET: A. Products/Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: BlueRidge Carpet Mills "Mirada III" Lees Carpet Mills "Falculty S.D." Mohawk Carpet "Perfume" B. Pattern, Color and Texture: The Architect reserves the right to vary color, pattern, and texture, from room to room and within room from area to area. C. Construction:Tufted step-over stitch, minimum 3/4" step-over, 100% solution dyed zeftron 500R nylon with built-in static control, treated with BASF stain protector and fluorocarbon soil repellent, 3 ply yam, 1/8" gauge, 28 ounces per square yard, 12 stitches per inch, .140 high, woven synthetic primary backing, jute or synthetic secondary backing, 7,200 density factor, 201,600 weight factor, total weight equal to 64 ounces, extra heavy commercial class III, ASTM E-648 average critical radiant flux: greater than .45 (ClassI), NBS Smoke Chamber Test, specific optical density less than 450. 2.02 CARPET ACCESSORIES: A. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile required for conditions where carpet and resilent vinyl tile abutt each other; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry (any manufacturer). 09680 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 CARPET ACCESSORIES: (Continued) B. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and other carpeting products' and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREINSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Installer must examine substrates to moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. C. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. 2. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. 3. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind duct edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 4. Install carpet edge g lard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. 5. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting, provide for movement. 09680 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: (Continued) B. Installation: 1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to actual installation. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement or additional adhesive backing strips. 2. Apply adhesive to floor surface and install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 3.03 REPAIRS: A. Remove bubbles and ripples, repair seams, joints, and edges, if required, once after the original installation is completed. The exact time for this work shall be left to the discretion of the Architect but shall be within 12 months after final approval of finished installation. 14-day notice for this resketch shall be given by the Architect, so that the Contractor can make necessary arrangements for same. B. Further, this Subcontractor shall provide a one-year unconditional guarantee against workmanship covering repair of seams, puckering, and any other defects that might be directly pointed to defect in workmanship. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. C. Protect carpet after installation by means of drop cloths or heavy reinforced, nonstaining Kraft paper during work. Damaged carpeting caused by the Contractor or their Subcontractors shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. At the completion of the work, the covering shall be removed, the carpeting vacuum-cleaned, all soiling removed and the carpet left in perfect condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 09680 09680 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09700 - RESIN FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete the Resin Floor work as shown on the drawings and schedules, and as specified herein, generally to include: 1. Epoxy floors with integral coved base. 2. Vinyl or rubber reducer strips where resin floor joins other flooring materials. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other Sections of these Specifications: 1. Protection of finishes floors. 1.02 QILALIT Y ASSURANCE: A. Wherever possible, provide resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. For information only, submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of resin flooring and accessory. Transmit a copy of each installation instruction to Installer. 09700 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: (Continued) B. Submit sample of each type, color and finish of resin flooring and accessory required. Provide full-size and 6" long sample of accessory. Include full range of flooring color and pattern variation. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. C. Adhesive, Mastics, Crack Fillers, Primers, Cleaners Polishers, Etc. Duplicate samples, at least 1/2 pint, in metal cans, shall be submitted only when requested by Architect. D. Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practice for each type of resin flooring and accessories. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Continuously heat areas to receive flooring to 70 degrees F. for at least 72 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain 70 degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by flooring manufacturer, but for not less than 72 hours. B. Substrates must be dry, smooth, level and free of dirt. Surface of substrates must not be coated with any type of membrane, sealer or curing compound. High spots shall be leveled by grinding and low areas shall be filled only with latex type underlayments. 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide standard guarantees for work under this section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 09700 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Delivery of all materials to job in unopened and containers with manufacturer's membrane name clearly marked thereon. B. Store all materials to protect them from moisture and extremes of heat and cold. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COLORS AND PATTERNS: A. Provide colors and patterns as shown or scheduled or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2.02 RESIN FLOORING: A. Resin flooring shall be "Quartzite" Mastertop Floor by Master Builders Technology, "Selbaclad" by Selby Battersby & Co. B. Color to be selected by Architect. C. Thickness shall be 1/8" thick. Surface shall be pitched away from walls edges and toward room floor drain. D. Base shall be integral resin coved base. Height shall be 4" high. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resin flooring and accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 09700 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: A. Contractor is responsible for ensuring wood subfloor is properly fastened to floor joists in area where new flooring is to be installed. Surface shall be clean and smooth in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Fill in cracks in sub-surfaces using approved crack-filler in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Clean subfloors of all remaining dirt and loose particles before application of flooring materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLOORING: A. Do not being installation until work of other trades, including painting, has been substantially completed. Use only experienced workmen. Adhere strictly to printed instruction of manufacturers of the materials. Refer to Architect for decisions in case of conflicts. B. Room temperature in any areas where resin flooring is being installed shall be maintained at a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F. from 72 hours prior to commencement of this work to at least 72 hours after its completion. C. Fit flooring neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases and thresholds, and around pipes, columns, and other projections. D. Install edge strips where flooring materials terminate at points higher than contiguous finishes flooring. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. After installation, allow resin materials to set properly before initial cleaning. Clean materials by damp mopping. Except for initial cleaning, allow resin materials, to set without traffic for at least five (5) days after installation. B. Install protective covering over completed surfaces. END OF SECTION 09700 09700 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 09900 - PAINTING FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS: A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted of the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of Massachusetts General Laws C. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered Al through A9 inclusive. E. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes touse to perform the following classes of work on part therof and the bid price therefor. CLASS OF WORK REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS None Required F. In any case in which the Sub-bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the class of work listed above, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB- BID, but not his bid price. 09900 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. C. The Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. D. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. E. "Paint" as used herein means all coating system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. F. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except where natural finish of materials is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color of finish is not designated, Architect will selected these from standard colors available for materials systems specified. 09900 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED: Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. A. Shop Primiin: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. Also, for fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework, and shop- fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. B. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer finishing specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance frames, doors and equipment. C. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, and furred areas. D. Finished Metal Surfaces: metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. E. Qperating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require fmish painting, unless otherwise indicated. F. Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriter's Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Where manufacturer makes more than one (1) grade of any material specified, this Subcontractor shall use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications. 09900 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Notwithstanding anything in the following schedule to the contrary, interior painting and finishing shall conform to the requirements of Department of Public Safety, Board of Standards Building Code and the National Fire Protection Association No. 101. C. Carefully review the conditions of the job against the code requirements, and use the appropriate paints and finishes as required. No claim for extra cost will be considered for failure to assign proper paint or finish to any given surface. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to stimulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect until acceptable sheet, color, and texture is achieved. 2. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and stained wood finish. Label and identify each as to location and application. 3. Maintenance Stock: At completion of installation, provide two gallons of each type and color of paint used on the project to Owner. 09900 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. All materials shall be stored in designated spaces in a manner which meets the requirements of applicable codes and fire regulations. When not in use, such spaces shall be kept locked and inaccessible to those not employed under this section. Each space shall be provided with a fire extinguisher or carbon dioxide or dry chemical type bearing the label of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and tag of recent inspection. C. All materials shall be brought to the building and stored in the mixing room in manufacturer's original sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's standard label indicating type and color. Materials shall be delivered in sufficient quantities in advance of the time needed in order that work will not be delayed in any way. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Apply water-base paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise permitted,by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 09900 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: (Continued) C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES: A. Prior to beginning the work, Architect will furnish Contractor with a complete COLOR SCHEDULE indicating precise color for all areas to be painted in the project. On the exterior, the Architect reserves the right to vary color from trim piece to trim piece and to use more than one color per trim piece. On the interior, the Architect reserves the right to vary color from room to room and to use more than one color per room as well as to vary color from trim piece to trim piece and to use more than one color per trim piece. B. Paint Coordination, Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints coatings systems for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. Failure to do so shall be construed as acceptance of the paints specified and the painter shall correct at his own expense all defects in his work resulting from the use of such materials. 09900 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIAL OUALIT A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: Pratt and Lambert, Inc. Benjamin Moore and Company Glidden Coatings and Resins, Corp. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Industries, Inc. B. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.03 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated: A. Concrete: Unfinished B. Brick and Concrete Masonry Units: Unfinished C. Ferrous Metal: 1st Coat - Red lead Pigmented primer 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel First coat not required on items delivered shop primed D. Painted Wood Trim and Columns: 1st Coat - Enamel undercoater 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel Not less than 3.0 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. 09900 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: (Continued) E. Painted Doors and Frames and Trim: 1st Coat - Enamel undercoat 2nd Coat - High-gloss enamel 3rd Coat - High-gloss enamel Not less than 3.0 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. F. Zinc Coated Metal: 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer 2nd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - High gloss alkyd enamel 2.04 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated: A. Gypsum Drywall Systems: , Semi-gloss finish in toilet room, janitor's closet, storage and sprinkler room Eggshell finish in all other rooms 1st Coat - Latex Primer 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion 3rd Coat - Interior latex emulsion Not less than 3.0 mils dry film thickness excluding lst coat. 1st Coat - Latex Primer 2nd Coat - Interior alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Interior alkyd enamel Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness excluding 1st coat. B. Gypsum Drywall Systems: Kitchen 105, Dishwashing 107, Storage 102, and Receiving 104 1st Coat - Latex Primer 2nd Coat - Water-based catalyzed Epoxy 3rd Coat - Water-based catalyzed Epoxy Not less than 7.4 mils dry film thickness. 09900 - 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS: (Continued) C. Painted Doors and Frames, Trim, and Woodwork: lst Coat - Enamel undercoat 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss or High-gloss enamel 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss or High-gloss enamel Not less than 3.0 mils dry film thickness excluding 1st coat. D. Concrete Floor: Unfinished except where carpet is to be installed, provide 1 coat of a polymer acrylic sealer to all concrete floors scheduled to receive carpet. Sealer to be compatable with flooring material. E. Ferrous Metal: 1st Coat - Red lead Pigmented primer 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel First coat not required on items delivered shop primed F. Zinc Coated Metal: 1st Coat - Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer 2nd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel 3rd Coat - Semi-gloss alkyd enamel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 09900 - 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.01 INSPECTION: (Continued) D. Drop clothes, building paper, and other protective measures shall be used to protect adjacent work, machinery, equipment and apparatus from damage of defacement. Damage and defacement shall be repaired in an approved manner at not additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 1. Depending upon item, Contractor and/or Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing Subcontractors shall remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finished-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, Contractor who removed item shall reinstall. 2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. C. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 1. Prime or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling. 2. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. 09900 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary ,stir materials before using. Materials shall be applied without the addition of any ingredients and without reducing or thinning except as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect. 3.04 APPLICATION: A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Painting surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 5. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop- primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. 09900 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 APPLICATION: (Continued) 6. Touch-up finish coats of factory-finished items that become damaged before completion of the building. Sand damaged areas smooth and apply specified primer before applying finish coat. Where spot touch up cannot be done neatly and blended smooth with other finish material, repaint entire surface or panel as approved by the Architect. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting of loss of adhesion of the undercoat. No painter's finish shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, and in no case in less than seven (7) days for exterior work nd two (2) days for interior work. C. Minimum Coatiniz Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint all exposed metal except stainless steel, anodized metals and factory-finished items provided under the MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL Sections, such as exposed pipes, pipe covering, conduits, ducts, wall louvers, radiator enclosures, registers, grilles, filters, pumps, fans enclosures, hangers, electrical boxes and all other apparatus and appurtenances. Do not paint floor registers and grilles. Do not paint galvanized or aluminum mechanical or electrical items that occur in mechanical rooms. Interior ducts that show through grilles shall be painted. Paint exposed sprinkler piping. Paint interior of panelboard cabinets before equipment installation. 09900 - 12 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.04 APPLICATION: (Continued) E. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. 1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION: A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finish work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. END OF SECTION 09900 09900 - 13 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10162 - TOILET PARTITION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to install toilet partitions as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. CABO/ANSI Al 17.1-1992 -- American National Standard for Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 1992. B. ASTM A 167-94 -- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1994. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated. Include data on hardware, accessories, leveling-and-anchorage devices, and fasteners. 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's standard samples for the following: 2. Submit for each distinct type of panel system color required. 3. Maintenance Data: Submit for each product specified in this section. Include instructions for cleaning and preventive maintenance. 10162 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. B Installer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. C Regulatory Requirements: Products and finished installations to be used by handicapped persons must comply with requirements of ANSI Al17.1. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements: If possible, determine field measurements before beginning shop fabrication. Wherever field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide components capable of adjustment during installation. 1.06 COORDINATION A Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system components and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation into other work. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL SYSTEMS A Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using one of the following panel systems: 1 Steel over honeycomb core, with plastic laminate finish, floor-anchored, with overhead rails. 10162 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 PANEL MATERIALS A General: Provide manufacturer's standard panels fabricated for installations indicated. Provide internal reinforcement as required for hardware and accessories. Premachine panels for field installation. B Shall be constructed of Industry Standard plastic laminate NEMA approved, laminated under heat and pressure to a solid 45 lb. density flakeboard core. Finished Doors shall be 1" thick. C Standard door size, other than "handicapped" is 24". D. Pilasters shall be 1 1/4" thick of same construction, finish and performance as for doors. Pilasters shall be secured to floor by means of a 1/4" thick anchor bar mechanism and shall be secured and leveled by using 3/8" bolts and nuts-tension/compression mounted. Pilasters shall be braced with extruded, anodized aluminum anti-grip headrail and wall return. E. Doors: Shall be equipped with top hinge recessed into door 2" from top with pin supported in door above and below top hinge bracket. Lower hinge shall be controlled power bearing consisting of cams under spring tension. Door weight shall be carried by power bearing only, not on the cams. Door cycling shall be on a level 3 plane and shall be operable and adjustable to any angle within a 270 degree arc. F. Brackets: For panels and pilasters shall be chrome plated zamac. G. Operation: A power bearing shall carry the door weight. All moving parts shall be concealed within the 1" door thickness. H. Accessories: Attachement and Construction. Hinge brackets shall be non-ferrous chrome plated stirrup type attached to the pilaster by means of through bolts. Top hinge bracket shall be bottom hinge bracket. 10162 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts I. Door keeper and stop shall be chrome plated keeper and with rubber bumper locked into place. Door latch shall be non-ferrous, chrome plated slide latch. Pilaster base shall be 3" high, stainless steel, polished finish to conceal floor (or ceiling) connections. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to properly install panel systems indicated. a. Hinge: Self-closing, pivot type hinge, recess-mounted within door; adjustable to permit door to rest at any angle''. b. Latch for nonhandicapped compartments: Surface-mounted type, with emergency access feature. Provide stop and keeper with rubber bumper. C. Latch for handicapped compartments: Surface-mounted sliding latch (for inner side of compartment doors), with emergency access feature, designed for use by handicapped persons. d. Door pull for handicapped compartments (for outer side of compartment doors): Suitable for use by handicapped persons. e. Leveling-and-anchorage devices: Rust-resistant steel devices as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels in conditions indicated. f. Pilaster shoes: ASTM A 167 (Type 302/304) minimum 20 gage stainless steel, finish to match compartment hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches. g. Fasteners: Tamper-resistant rust-proof, exposed fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels and hardware in conditions indicated. Finish to match hardware. 10162 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies. D Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work, have been properly installed and aligned. E Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions. B Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated. Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable. C Compartments: a. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets at wall connections. Clearances exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level, plumb installation. b. Floor-anchored compartments: Form solid connections at floor. Unless otherwise instructed by panel manufacturer, secure pilasters with leveling-and-anchorage devices which penetrate a minimum of 2 inches into floor. Conceal attachment by installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install panels. D Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 10162 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 ADJUSTING - A Operating Hardware: a In-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest in fully closed position when door is not latched. b Out-swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. 3.04 CLEANING A Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A Protect installed components from damage until project completion. END OF SECTION 10162 10162 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: "Portable Fire Extinguishers" includes units which can be hand- carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing systems, unless otherwise indicated. Type of products in this section include: 1. Fire Extinguishers 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets C. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 2. Painting Section 09900 3. Fire Protection Section 15300 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by one of the following: J.L. Industries Larsen's Manufacturing Co. or approved equal 10520- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALI TY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Provide new portable fire extinguishers which comply with applicable UL standards and are labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories. Contractor shall verify all fire extinguisher sizes and type and extinguisher cabinet requirements with the Fire Department prior to final approval of shop drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions. Include rough-in dimensions and details showing mounting methods, relationship to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction. Where color selection is required, Architect shall select from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS: A. General: Provide two fire extinguishers and cabinets (F.E.C.) on the First Floor and one fire extinguisher (F.E.) on wall mounted bracket in the Kitchen adjacent cooking area. B. Fire Extin igu sher: Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguisher, UL rated 4-A:60:B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires. C. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard enamel steel box with trim, frame, and door hardware. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Cabinet to be fully recessed-type unless construction conditions at designated locations do not allow. Trim shall have corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Door shall be full-glass panel with printed lettering and manufacturer's standard door operating hardware. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hanger permitting door to open 180 degrees. Apply cabinet finish in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment. 10520 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or it not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguishers cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer' instructions. END OF SECTION 10520 10520 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10530 - BUILT-IN SPECIALITIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Scone of Work: The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing all built-in specialty items. B. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Wood blocking and furring - Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for the installation of miscellaneous specialties as required. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Products: 1. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same areas, wherever possible. 2. Coordinate with the Architect for acceptable designs and finishes. 3: Stamps names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be permitted, except where otherwise specified. 10530 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings to the Architect for approval. Show details, dimensions, locations and installation methods of all work under this Section. B. Do not commence fabrication or installation until approval has been obtained. C. Submit samples for all materials required by the Architect for approval. 1.04 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provision of the GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturer shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCH: A. Furnish and install where indicated on drawings metal roof scuttle Type "S" as manufactured by Bilco Manufacturing Co. Cover shall be 14 gauge with a 3" beaded flange and formed reinforcing members, welded to support a minimum live load of 40 lbs/sq ft. Insulation shall be 1" thick fully covered and protected by a metal liner. Curb shall be equiped with an integral cap flashing. Cover shall equiped with a hold-open device and a handle for opening. Size of unit shall be 3'-0" x 2'-611 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine the areas and conditions under which miscellaneous specialities are to be installed. Correct all conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written specifications. END OF SECTION 10530 10530 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10540 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The Extent of the work shall include the furnishing and installation of an automatic fire suppression system using a wet chemical agent for grease related fires. The system shall be capable of suppressing fires in the following areas associated with cooking equipment: ventilating equipment including hoods, ducts, plenums, and filters; fryers, griddles and range tops; upright, natural charcoal, or chain-type broilers; electric, lava rock, mesquite or gas-radiant char-broilers. The system shall be the pre-engineered type having minimum and maximum guidelines established by the manufacturer and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). The system shall be installed and serviced by personnel trained by the manufacturer. B. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 2. Painting Section 09900 3. Fire Protection Section 15300 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide portable fire suppression system and accessories by one manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 1. Manufacturer: The Restaurant Fire Suppression System shall be manufactured by a company with at least thirty years experience in the design and manufacture of pre-engineered fire suppression systems. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 registered. 10540 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 U4 ALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) 2. Certificates: The wet agent shall be a specially formulated, aqueous solution of organic salts with a pH range between 7.8 - 8.2, designed for flame knockdown and foam securement of grease-related fires. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions. Include rough-in dimensions and details showing mounting methods, relationship to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction. Where color selection is required, Architect shall select from manufacturer's standard colors. 1.04 REFERENCES: A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL Standard 1254 UL Standard 300 B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 96 NFPA 17A 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. Attention is directed to provision of the GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturer shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: Ansul Fire Protection, One Stanton Street, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542, Telephone (715)735-7411. 10540 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 COMPONENTS: A. The basic system shall consist of an ANSUL AUTOMAN R-102 regulated release assembly which includes a regulated release mechanism and a wet chemical storage tank housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles, blow off caps, detectors, cartridges, agent, fusible links, and pulley elbows shall be supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for fire suppression system arrangements. Additional equipment shall include remote manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and electrical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. B. Wet Chemical Agent: The extinguishing agent shall be a specially formulated, aqueous solution of organic salts with a pH range between 7.8 - 8.2, designed for flame knockdown and foam securement of grease-related fires. C. Agent Tank: The agent tank shall be installed in a stainless steel enclosure or wall bracket. The tank shall be deep drawn carbon steel finished in red enamel. Tanks shall be available in two sizes; 1.5 gallon (5.7 L) and 3.0 gallon (11.4 L). the tanks shall have a working pressure of 100 psi (6.9 bar), a test pressure of 300 psi (20.7 bar), and a minimum burst pressure of 600 psi (41.4 bar). The tank shall include and adaptor/tube assembly containing a burst disc union. D. Regulated Release Mechanism: The regulate release mechanism shall be a spring-loaded, mechanical / pneumatic type capable of providing the expellant gas supply to one or two agent tanks depending on the capacity of the gas cartridge used. It shall contain a factory installed regulator deadset at 100 psi (6.9 bar) with an internal relief of approximately 145 psi (10.0 bar). It shall have the following actuation capabilities: automatic actuation by a fusible link detection system and remote manual actuation by a mechanical pull station. The regulated release mechanism shall contain a release assembly, regulator, expellant gas hose, and agent storage tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure with cover. The enclosure shall contain knock-outs for 1/2 in. conduit. The cover shall contain an opening for a visual status indicator. It shall be compatible with mechanical gas shut-off devices; or, when equipped with a field or factory installed switch, it shall be compatible with electric gas line or appliance shut-off devices. 10540 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 COMPONENTS: (Continued) E. Regulated Actuator Assembly: When more than two agents are required, the regulated actuator shall be available to provide expellant gas for additional tanks. It shall be connected to the cartridge receiver outlet of the regulated release mechanism providing simultaneous agent discharge. The regulator shall be deadset at 100 psi (6.9 bar) with an internal relief of approximately 145 psi (10.0 bar). The regulated actuator assembly shall contain a regulated actuator, regulator, expellant gas hose, and agent tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure with cover. The enclosure shall contain knockouts to permit installation of the expellant gas line. F. Discharge Nozzles: Each discharge nozzle shall be tested and listed with the R-102 system for a specific application. Nozzle tips shall be stamped with the flow number designation (1/2, 1, 2 and 3). each nozzle shall have a metal or rubber blow-off cap to keep the nozzle tip orifice free of cooking grease build-up. G. Distribution Piping: Distribution piping shall be Schedule 40 black iron, chrome plated, or stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120, A53, or A106. H. Detectors: The detectors shall be the fusible link style designed to separate at a specific temperature. I. Cartridges: The cartridge shall be a sealed steel pressure vessel containing either carbon dioxide or nitrogen gas. the cartridge seal shall be designed to be punctured by the releasing device supplying the required pressure to expel wet chemical agent from the storage tank. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. The R-102 fire suppression system shall be designed, installed, inspected, maintained, and recharged in accordance with the manufacturer's listed instruction manual. B. Training: Training shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10520 10540 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10650 - ELECTRICALLY OPERABLE PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The work of this section consists of furnish and installing an electrically operated movable partition. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS: A. The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 2. Electrical Division 16000 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Complete shop drawings are to be provided prior to fabrication indicating construction and installation details. 10650 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E657 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions. B. The partition STC (Sound Transmission Classification) shall be achieved per the standard test methods ASTM E90 and ASTM E413. C. Noise isolation classifications shall be achieved per the standard test methods ASTM E336 and ASTM E413. D. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) ratings shall be per ASTM C423. E. The manufacturer shall have a quality system that is registered to the ISO 9001 standards. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Proper storage of partitions before installation and continued protection during and after installation will be the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. Partition shall be guaranteed for a period of two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: Hufcor, Modernfold, Panelfold. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Product to be top supported Series 5900E electrically operated, continously hinged panels as manufactured by Hufcor, Inc. or equal. 1. Panels shall be nominally 3" thick, to 48" in width and hinged in groups of two or three. 2. Panel faces shall be of Class "A" rated gypsum laminated to appropriate substrates to meet the STC requirement in 2.04 Acoustical Performance. 10650 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: (Continued) 3. Frames shall be of 18 gauge painted steel. 4. Edges of frame and face material will be protected with polyvinylchloride trim. 5. Vertical interlock between panels shall be dual durometer polyvinylchloride in a tongue and groove configuration. Design provides minimum 1/1/4" panel-to-panel interlock. The lead panel shall seal against finished wall surface without the need for wall mounted jambs. 6. Horizontal top seals shall be continuous contact multi-ply vinyl. 7. Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide a maximum of 2" nominal operating clearance, and exert a minimum of 40 lbs. downward force when extended. 8. Hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more than 1/4" beyond panel faces. Each pair of panels to have a minimum of three hinges. B. Weight of the panels shall be 5.3-8.9 lbs. per sq. ft. based on options selected. C. Suspension system: 1. Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the structural support by min. 3/8" dia. threaded steel hanger rods. Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required. a. Each panel shall be supported by one 4-wheeled carrier in the track and one internal 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of precision ground steel ball bearings with heat treated and hardened races encased with molded polymer tires. b. Factory assembled power unit shall include motor, torque limiter, and brake, two key control stations wired in series, emergency release, and all necessary equipment for electric operation. Roller chain drive shall attach to carrier of lead panel. Limit switches shall be provide to prevent over travel. Motor shall be 60 Hz, and 115 volt with adequate horsepower. 10650 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 MATERIALS: (Continued) D. Finishes: 1. Face finish shall be: a. Factory applied 100% polyolefm stain resistant fabric weighing not less than 12 oz. per linear yard. Color shall be selected from manufacturer's standard color selector. 2. Frame and trim color shall be standard color as selected by Architect. 2.03 OPERATION: A. Panels shall be manually moved from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set. B. Retractable Horizontal Seals: 1. Retractable horizontal seals shall be activated by a removable quick-set operating handle located approximately 42" from the floor in the panel edge. 2. All retractable seals in each hinged panel group shall be operated simultaneously. 3. Seal activation requires approximately 15 lbs. of force per panel and approximately a 190 degree turn of the removable handle. C. Final partition closure to be: Expanding jamb which compensates for minor wall irregularities and provides a minimum of 250 lbs. seal force against the adjacent wall for optimum sound control. The jamb activator shall be located approximately 45 degrees from the floor in the panel face and be accessed from either side of the panel. The jamb is equipped with a mechanical rack and pinion gear drive mechanism and shall extend 4"-6" by turning the removable operating handle. D. Stack/Store Panels 1. Retract seals with removable operating handle and move to storage area. 10650 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE: A. Acoustical performance shall be tested at a laboratory accredited by the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) and in accordance with ASTM E90 Test Standards. Standard panel construction shall have obtained an STC rating of 43. 1. Complete, unaltered written test report is to be made available upon request. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. The complete installation of the operable wall system shall be by an authorized factory-trained installer and be in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's standard printed specifications, instructions, and recommendations. B. CLEANING: 1. All track and panel surfaces shall be wiped clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil. 2. Cartoning and other installation debris shall b removed from the job site. C. TRAINING: 1. Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to owner's representative. 2. Operating handle and owners manuals shall be provided to owner's representative. END OF SECTION 10650 10650 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory to be furnished is generally listed in these specifications. B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. C. TTes of toilet accessories required include the following: 1. Paper towel dispensers 2. Toilet tissue dispensers 3. Mirrors 4. Grab bars D. The Contractor shall install those items on the drawings and in the specifications. Contractor shall provide blocking as required for all toilet accessories. E. Related Work In Other Sections: The following items of associated work are included in other sections of these specifications. 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 2. Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 3. Plumbing Section 15400 1.02 UO ALITY ASSURANCE: A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 10800 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: (Continued) B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. C. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by one of the following: American Specialities Co., Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. The Charles Parker Co. or approved equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gage minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mirror Glass: FS DD-G-451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 1/4" thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating, and nonmetallic paint coating. C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same materials as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted, except where otherwise indicated. Wherever locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock. 10800 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.02 FABRICATION: (Continued) B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1-1/2" pin hinges of same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. The following model numbers of American Specialities Co. have been used to indicate the type and quality of devices required and are for reference purposes only. 1. Paper Towel Dispenser: American Specialities Model #0210 (Large). 2. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: American Specialities Model #7305. 3. Waste Receptacle: American Specialities Model #0828. 4. Toilet Room Mirror: Size as indicated on drawings Mirror edges shall be ground smooth. Glass shall be 1/4" plate/float glass. Furnish mounting clips for concealed mounting. 5. Grab Bars: 42" long American Specialities Model #3100P series Stainless steel, concealed fastening, knurled finish. Grab bars to have back-up plates with bolted studs for mounting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine substrates, previously installed inserts and anchorages necessary for mounting of toilet accessories, and other conditions under which installation is to occur, and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 10800 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated. 1. Kitchen: Paper Towel Dispenser, large (1 required) Waste Receptacle (1 required) 2. Dishwashing: Paper Towel Dispenser, large (1 required) 3. Women's Toilet: Toilet Paper Dispenser (2 required) Paper Towel Dispenser, large (1 required) Waste Receptacle (1 required) Mirror (1 required) Grab Bars (2 required) 4. Men's Toilet: Toilet Paper Dispenser (1 required) 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. B. Clean and op lish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 10800 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# SECTION 15000 SUMMARY OF MECHANICAL WORK 1-2 SECTION 15007 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 1-3 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-11 SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH. EQUIPMENT 1-2 SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1-3 SECTION 15100 VALVES 1-4 SECTION 15135 METERS AND GAUGES 1-2 SECTION 15140 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1-4 SECTION 15190 PIPING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT TAGS ANSI COMPLIANCE 1-4 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION 1-3 SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 1-2 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ADD ALTERNATE#1) 1-7 SECTION 15411 PLUMBING 1-5 SECTION 15420 PLUMBING WASTE 1-4 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS 1-2 SECTION 15488 GAS PIPING 1-7 SECTION 15540 PUMPS 1 SECTION 15600 HEATINGNENTILATING&AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1-2 SECTION 15860 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 1-2 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# SECTION 15900 METAL DUCTWORK 1-4 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1-5 SECTION 15971 CONTROL SYSTEM 1-4 SECTION 15985 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS 1 SECTION 15990 TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1-3 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts - APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# SECTION 15000 SUMMARY OF MECHANICAL WORK 1-2 SECTION 15007 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 1-3 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-11 SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH.EQUIPMENT 1-2 SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1-3 SECTION 15100 VALVES 1-4 SECTION 15135 METERS AND GAUGES 1-2 SECTION 15140 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1-4 SECTION 15190 PIPING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT TAGS ANSI COMPLIANCE 1-4 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION 1-3 SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 1-2 SECTION 15540 PUMPS I SECTION 15600 HEATINGNENTILATING&AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 1-2 SECTION 15860 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 1-2 SECTION 15900 METAL DUCTWORK 1-4 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1-5 SECTION 15971 CONTROL SYSTEM 1-4 SECTION 15985 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS 1 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1-3 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK (FMED SUB-BID REQUMD) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-Bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of Massachusetts. C. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered H-1 inclusive. 1.02 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING WORK (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# SECTION 15000 SUMMARY OF MECHANICAL WORK 1-2 SECTION 15007 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 1-3 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-11 SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECH. EQUIPMENT 1-2 SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 1-3 SECTION 15100 VALVES 1-4 SECTION 15135 METERS AND GAUGES 1-2 SECTION 15140 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1-4 SECTION 15190 PIPING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT TAGS ANSI COMPLIANCE 1-4 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION 1-3 SECTION 15411 PLUMBING 1-5 SECTION 15420 PLUMBING WASTE 1-4 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS 1-2 SECTION 15488 GAS PIPING 1-7 SECTION 15540 PUMPS 1 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PLUMBING WORK (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-Bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of Massachusetts. C. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". D. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered P-1 through P-2 inclusive. 1.02 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION WORK (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM(ADD ALTERNATE#1) 1-7 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts FIRE PROTECTION WORK (FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED) PARTI - GENERAL 1.01 FILING SUB-BIDS A. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". B. Each Sub-Bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of Massachusetts. C. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15000 - MECHANICAL PART 1 - GENERA L 1.01 SUMMARY OF MECHANICAL WORKS A. Identification: Refer to the Contract (Owner-Contractor Agreement) for name location, project number and abbreviation identification of the work of the project. B. Contract Documents: Requirements of the work are contained in the contract documents, and include cross-references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. Refer to the General as well as Special Conditions of the Contract. C. Verbal Summary of Works: Contractor to provide complete in place mechanical systems, as shown on drawings and/or as needed for a complete and proper installation, tested and in compliance with all federal, State and local codes the (incomplete) description of the work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Furnish and install new fixtures, equipment and plumbing systems complete with all associated piping. B. Sanitary, waste, vent and storm drainage piping to all equipment and fixtures as specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings. C. Domestic hot, cold, and hot water return piping to all equipment and fixtures as specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings. D. Access panels for all valves, drains, and equipment. E. Testing, sterilization and guarantees. F. All hangers, inserts, sleeves, expansion loops, expansion compensators, anchors, guides, strainers, gauges, thermometers plus all related accessories required for a complete installation for each system, as specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings. 15000- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts G. Add alternate dry pipe sprinkler system, complete with all related components. H. Furnish and install insulation on all piping, ductwork and equipment as specified or indicated on the drawings. I. Furnish and install vibration isolators for equipment, expansion compensators for piping and ductwork. J. Furnish and install heating and ventilating and exhaust systems, consisting of; HVAC units, exhaust fans, ductwork, louvers, diffusers, registers and grilles. K. Furnish and install Automatic Temperature Controls. L. Furnish and install equipment bases, supports and supplemental support steel. Structural steel and concrete housekeeping pads shall be supplied by the General Contractor. M. Furnish and install piping, duct, valve and equipment identification. N. Storage, protection of materials as well as transporting, hoisting, and rigging required to complete the work under this section. O. Furnish and install sleeves, inserts and hangers for all mechanical systems. P. Balance air systems. Q. Provide record drawings of the HVAC, Plumbing and Sprinkler systems. R. Provide HVAC, Plumbing and Sprinkler systems operating instructions and maintenance manuals. 15000- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15007 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provisions of Division-1 sections, General Requirements, apply to the entire work of this Contract. B. Indicated: Shown on drawings or written into other portions of contract documents. C. Approved by Architect/Engineer: Does not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of contract documents. D. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly installation, and similar subsequent requirements. E. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements. F. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. G. Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled in work they are engaged to install. H. Specification Text Format: Imperative language is directed at Contractor, unless otherwise noted. I. Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements: Most stringent (generally) requirement written directly into contract documents is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer uncertainties to Architect/Engineer for decision before proceeding. J. Minimum Requirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply (within specified tolerances), or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits. Refer 15007-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts uncertainties to Architect/Engineer before proceeding. K. Abbreviations, Plural Words: Abbreviation, where not defined in contract documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, determined by recognized grammatical rules, by the Architect/Engineer. L. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of contract documents. M. Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged for the project to provide inspection, tests, interpretations, reports and similar services. 1.02 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. Industry Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect on performance of the work as if copied directly into contract documents or bound and published therewith. Standards referenced in contract documents or in governing regulations have precedence over non-referenced standards, insofar as different standards may contain overlapping or conflicting requirements. Comply with standards in effect as of date of contract documents, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Local and State building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire and health department codes. 2. American Gas Association (AGA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 4. American Insurance Association (A.I.A) (formerly National Board of fire underwriters). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. Factory Mutual Association (FM). 7. Department of Environmental Quality Engineering (DEQE). 8. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 15007-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 10. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 11. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 12. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 13. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA). 14. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 15. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 16. Building Officials and Code Administrators (BOCA). 17. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 18. National Electric Code (NEC). 19. Department of Environmental Quality Engineering (DEQE). 20. State of Massachusetts' Building Code. 21. City of North Andover Regulations and Ordinances. 22. A.D.A. (Americans with Disability Act). 15007-3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PARTI - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of division 15. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1. B. The Contractor, before submitting a proposal, will visit the site to determine the conditions under which work will be performed. C. No request for extra compensation will be considered for hardships encountered which would have been disclosed or made evident by a reasonable examination of the site. D. Permits and Inspections: Refer to General Conditions. E. Codes and Standards: Refer to the General Conditions. F. Taxes and Insurance: This Contractor shall include in his bid, applicable federal, state and local taxes and the premiums of the insurance required by the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. G. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following publications in addition to codes referenced elsewhere in this Division. Applicable State and Local Codes. 1.02 REFERENCE SYMBOLS A. Symbols shown on the drawings show approximate location of fixtures, ductwork, piping, and other equipment, unless otherwise detailed. The exact location will be governed by structural conditions, appearance and obstructions. This is not to be construed so as to permit redesigning systems. B. It is not intended that the drawings show in detail every fitting and appurtenance, etc., but all material necessary to complete the system in accordance with the practices of the trade and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect will be provided without 15010- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts additional recompense under this Division of the specifications. C. No deviations from the layout will be made without written approval of the Engineer. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. E. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. F. Access doors, in ceiling floors and walls; shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. 1.03 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to the connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements. C. All controls and receptacles to be set at ADA mounting height requirements. 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. 15010- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installation. I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installation. J. Coordinate the installation of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 1.05 VIBRATION AN NOISE A. All equipment and ductwork distribution systems shall be properly attenuated. Noise levels in occupied space shall be at NC-35 or lower in all frequencies. Contractor shall be responsible to rectify any noise and vibration problems that are found to be unacceptable. 1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment. B. Refer to the Division 1 Section: Cutting and Patching for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 16 Section: Basic Electrical Requirements for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 15010- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work; 2. Remove and replace defective work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing; 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed work. 1.07 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 1 Section: Shop Drawings, Product Data, and samples for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures. B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when stamped "approved" by the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples" Section of AIA Document A201. Data Submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be proceeded. C. Provide product data on material and equipment furnished for approval. Provide shop drawings of mechanical room layout and control systems. 1.08 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 15010- 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. To establish a standard of design, quality and function, specific products are scheduled on the drawings and in the specifications. Contractors wishing to substitute products other than scheduled must submit a written request to the Engineer for approval at time of Bids. Each such request shall include catalog data and any other information necessary for a complete evaluation. Any deviations from the product specified must be noted. Manufacturers of products similar in quality and function are listed in the specifications, but such listing does not necessarily mean that a substitute by the manufacturer will be accepted. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating the installation of accepted substitutions, making such changes as may be required for the work to be completed in all respects. Any additional cost, or any loss or damage arising from the substitution of any material or method for those originally specified shall be borne by the Contractor, not withstanding approval or acceptance of such substitution by the Owner, Architect or Engineer, unless such substitution was made at the written request or direction of the Owner, Architect or Engineer. C. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders for additional requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions. 1.09 NAMEPLATE DATA A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. 1.10 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 15010 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.11 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 Section: Project Closeout or Project Record Documents for requirements. Minimum of three sets in reproducible format (sepia or velum) shall be submitted; (one set to be retained by the Engineer and two sets for the Owner). The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance. C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to Division 1 Section: Project Closeout or Operation and maintenance Data for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of three maintenance manuals; (one O&M manual for Engineer and two sets to be retained by the Owner). B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information: 1. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut- down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 2. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 3. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 4. A periodic preventative maintenance and inspection schedule for each system 15010 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts land for the components in the system, listing inspection and maintenance operations to be performed daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and annually as required to provide for long life and faithful performance of the systems. 5. One copy of the valve charts in clear plastic covers and bound in each operating and maintenance manuals. 1.13 WARRANTIES A. Refer to Division 1 Section: Specific Warranties for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 15, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. C. Provide complete warranty information for each item of product or equipment to include data of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and name, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee in writing for one year from date of acceptance all work performed and materials and equipment installed to the full extent required by the Drawings and Specifications to be free from inherent defects. Equipment compressors shall carry an additional 4 years manufacturer's warrantee. B. Any materials or equipment which are corroded or otherwise damaged, through the Mechanical Contractor's failure to properly store, operate and maintain the installation during construction or testing, shall be replaced prior to final acceptance. C. Keep the work in repair and replace any defective materials, equipment or workmanship upon notice from the Architect or Owner's Representative for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. Correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee within Contract Price. D. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as defined and as directed by Architect. 15010- 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts E. Guarantee shall include 24-hour service of complete system during guarantee period at no cot to owner. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval. F. Submit guarantee to Architect before final payment. G. This Paragraph shall not be interpreted to limit owner's rights under applicable codes and laws under this contract. H. Use of systems provided under this Section for temporary services and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by Owner, and shall not institute guarantee period. I. Provide manufacturer's engineering and technical staff at site to analyze and rectify problems that develop during guarantee period immediately. If problems cannot be rectified immediately to Owner's satisfaction, advise Architect in writing, describe efforts to rectify situation, and provide analysis of cause of problem. Architect will suggest course of action. J. The date of acceptance shall be that which appears on the Architect's certificate of final payment. 1.15 CLEANING A. Refer to Division 1 Section: Project Closeout or Final Cleaning for general requirements for final cleaning. B. Refer to Division 15 Section: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance. 1.16 RUBBISH REMOVAL A. Each day, or when ordered by the General Contractor or the Architect, this Contractor shall remove from the property, all the rubbish and waste material belonging to him. Keep the job site free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish; premises must be maintained in a clean condition. 1.17 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. This Contractor shall provide, suitable and substantial watertight sheds in which he shall store all his materials and equipment on the premises and where directed by the 15010- 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts Architect, and maintain in good condition, and shall remove structures when directed. 1.18 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. All water, electricity, fire protection and sanitary facilities required for safe and efficient construction during normal working hours shall be furnished in accordance with the General Requirements and Supplementary General Requirements. 1.19 TESTS A. Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, supplies and services and bear all cost for the accomplishment of the tests herein specified or required by governing Authorities. Correct all defects appearing under test, repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed and leave the equipment clean and ready for use. B. Cost for additional testing that may be required for problem resolution during heating or cooling season shall be included as part of the base bid. C. Perform any tests, other than therein specified, which may be specified by legal authorities or by agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform. D. Dispose of test water and wastes after tests are complete, in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and in accordance with governing regulations. 1.20 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. All excavation and backfilling required for piping installed under this Division will be performed by the General Contractor. 1. The General Contractor will provide all necessary protection and pumping work required to keep the excavated areas free for work. 2. The General Contractor will provide all necessary bracing and shoring required to protect the sides of the excavation. 1.21 PAINTING A. All ductwork and piping exposed to view shall be primed and finish fainted by General Contractor to color as selected by Architect. 15010- 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Where radiation covers are factory primed only, they shall be painted and finished by the General Contractor. C. The following items shall be painted by the Mechanical Contractor: 1. All pumps, tanks, heat exchangers and all other factory manufactured and assembled apparatus shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of machinery enamel except where special finishes are otherwise specified herein. 2. All items scratched or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and painted to match the original finish. 3. In Mechanical rooms, paint all exposed pipe, hangers, anchors, guides, cradles, structural steel supports, stands, etc., with two (2) coats of black asphaltum paint. D. All exposed gas piping, in Mechanical room only, shall be painted yellow and lettered in black as "gas" respectively. Concealed gas lines shall be painted black by Mechanical Contractor and labeled throughout in yellow labels with the letters in black as "GAS PIPING". 1.22 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A The following related work shall be performed by the designated trades and under the listed Section: 1. Unless otherwise noted, cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and shall be performed by trades specializing in the specific surfaces affected, i.e. carpentry, masonry, metals, etc. 2. Excavation and backfill shall be performed by the General Contractor. 3. Temporary heat shall be provided during construction in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. 4. Wiring of equipment requiring power connections furnished by this Contractor unless otherwise specified, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor, Section 16000. 15010 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 5. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished and power-wired by Electrical Contractor. Mechanical Contractor shall install duct smoke detector and shall do fan shut-down interlock wiring. 6. Painting of all ductwork, air devices, fittings, supports, etc., which do not have enameled surfaces, stainless steel or anodized aluminum finishes and which are exposed in finished spaces and are not otherwise specified hereunder or called out on the Drawings shall be by the Mechanical Contractor. 7. Exterior louvers and vents shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and installed by General Contractor. Brick vents shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. S. Concrete equipment bases and structural steel support for equipment furnished shall be by the General Contractor. Incidental metal angle bracing or supports shall be by the Mechanical Contractor. 9. Roofing-in of roof mounted equipment shall be by the Roofing Sub-Contractor. 10. Access panels in plaster ceilings or masonry or dry walls to service mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. 15010 - 11 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIP. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components for mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to starters and disconnect switches. B. Provide factory mounted disconnects and furnish accessory starters as indicated on schedule. Where not indicated, furnish starters and disconnects to Electrical Contractor as required for proper installation and operation of equipment. C. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). D. Electrical components and materials shall be U.L. labeled. E. Starters, Electrical Devices and Wiring. F. Motor Starter Characteristics: 1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3 with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall have NEC proper class and division. 2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacture for applicable protection and start-up condition. G. Manual switches shall have: 1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors. 2. Melting alloy type thermal overload relays where motors are not internally -overload protected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC STARTERS 15030-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. Momentary contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated. B. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase. C. Interlocks, contacts, and similar devices as required for coordination with control requirements of Division-15 controls sections. D. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds 240 volts. E. Externally operated manual reset. F. Under-voltage release or protection. G. H.O.A. positioner. 2.02 MOTOR CONNECTIONS A. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated. 2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Fusible switches: Fused, each phase, heavy duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; are quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated. B. Non-fusible switches: For equipment 1/2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than 1/2 horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type. 15030-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Pipe and Fittings: Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 15 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that particular system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split ring escutcheons, with set screw. Inside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. B. Unions: Malleable-iron, class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure service; hexagonal stock, with ball and socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. D. Sleeves: Steel Sleeves, Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A. E. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: For foundation walls provide modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 15055 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Remove scale, slag, and dirt for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly. C. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade of floors, unless indicated otherwise. D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. E. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated on the Drawings. F. Install piping tight to slabs, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removal ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve, and a short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap with chain. I. Exterior wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller that 6" shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6" and larger shall be sheet metal (18 GA). J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, and all floor - ceiling assemblies, the fire rated integrity shall be maintained. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials. 3.02 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATIONS A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. B. Install unions at the final connection to each piece of equipment and plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, adjacent to each valve, at the final 15055 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems (gas, compressed air, vacuum). E. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems (water, steam). F. Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through masonry walls, floors, roofs, and fire- rated assemblies. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for insulation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provided temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 15055 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15100 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems. B. General: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping. C. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising outside screw and yoke stems; except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems. D. Pressure and Temperature Rating: As required to suit system pressures and temperatures. E. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. F. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handle on quarter-turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. 3. Chain-wheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger install 72 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0" and finished floor elevation. G. Extended stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation. H. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. I. End Connections: As specified in the individual valves specifications. 15100-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1 2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B 16.24 for bronze valves. 3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. J. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg. F. for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg. F. for ball valves. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B.62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing glad, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valve meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires. B. 2 1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece backing glad assembly. C. At boilers provide steel gate valves 250 lb ASME/ANSI B16.34 OS&Y with trim suitable for service temperature and pressure. 2.02 BALL VALVES (Owner prefers Watts Co., Valves) A. 1 Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 PSI saturated steam pressure, 400 PSI WOG pressure; 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water services; threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. B. 1 1/4 Inch to 2 Inch: Rated for 150 PSI saturated steam pressure, 400 PSI WOG pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, Conventional port, chromeplated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser water, 15100-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water services; threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. 2.03 PLUG VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: 150 PSI WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded ends. B. 2 1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 PSI lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single glad, wrench operated, flanged ends. 2.04 GLOBE VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure required. B. 2 1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-70 Class 125 PSI, cast iron, bronze trim SWP-20 PSI, WOG, solid disc, bolted bonnet, gland packed, flanged ends. 2.05 SWING VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B62, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, with a bronze disc, and having threaded or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure requires or Class 125 are not available. Provide Class 150 for heating hot water. B. 2 1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 PI, cast iron body, bronze trim, SWP- 200 PSI, WOG bolted cap, flanged ends. 2.06 WAFER CHECK VALVES A. Non-Slam Class 250, cast iron body, replaceable lapped bronze seat, lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers shall be loaded with a stainless steel torsion spring to minimize flapper drag and assure even non-slam checking action. 15100-3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water and low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved-end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 1/2 Inch and Larger: Grooved-end or flanged. C. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty, globe, ball, and plug valves for throttling duty. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. B. Install 3-valves bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves. C. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. D. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drain with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. E. Install extended-stem valves, where insulation is indicated, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. F. A new meter(s) to read all flow measuring devices (flow setters or circuit setters) shall be turned over after water balancing is completed to the Owner. 15100-4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install thermometer and pressure gauges as indicated on the drawings for the high pressure/low pressure steam and hydronic systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMOMETERS A. Direct Mount Thermometers or dial type suitable for the service and pressure rating. B. Provide direct mount dial thermometers of vapor tension, universal angle type, drawn steel or brass case, glass lens, 3" diameters, copper bulb with phosphor bronze Bourdon pressure tube, one scale division accuracy, brass precision geared movement, 40 degrees to 240 deg. F. range for hot water systems. C. Industrial type, 9" scale, perma-colored type, black scale divisions on white face, union hub, separable brass well and adjustable base suitable for pressure and temperature range. D. Manufacturer: Marsh; Trerice; or Weiss. 2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide pressure gauges of general use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection, drawn steel brass case, glass lens 4-1/2" diameter, with 1/4" brass male NPT connection, drawn steel or brass case, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter, with 1/4" brass male NPT connector, range to suit. B. Manufacturer: Ametek; Marshalltown; Trerice; or Weiss. C. Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on hydronic piping systems. Construct gage cock of brass with 1/4 " female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug. Provide 1/4" brass bushing snubber with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for 15135 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts fluid served and pressure rating. D. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. B. Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. Install pressure gauge cocks in piping tee with snubber. 15135 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Comply With The Following: B. Provide pipe hangers and supports which comply with MSS SP-58. C. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. D. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. E. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. F. General: Except as otherwise indicated, for each piping system provide factory- fabricated horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, selected by contractor to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. G. Wherever seismic conditions apply hanger systems shall be appropriately reinforced or resupported by cables. H. All hangers in mechanical room shall be painted with two coates of black asphaltum paint. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer of Hangers and Supports; B-Line Systems; Carpenter and Patterson: Fee & Mason; or ITT Grinnel. B. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles and shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles 15140 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Insulation at saddle locations shall be of 8 lbs. density. C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar Piping D. Support fire-water piping independently of other piping. 15140 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts E. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. G. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. H. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. I. Comply with the following installation requirements for insulated piping: 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold water piping or heating piping, install coated galvanized protective shields. At shields install sections of 6 lb density insulation. J. Install anchors at power locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. K. Install anchors where not otherwise indicated, at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. L. Hanger adjustment: adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. M. Support adjustment: provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. N. Provide concrete housekeeping bases (constructed by General Contractor) for floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work of division 15. Bases are required for; boiler and water storage tanks. Size bases to extend minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of 15140- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's template. Chamfer top and edge corners. O. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. provide factory-fabricated tank saddles or tanks mounted on steel stands. 15140 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15190 - PIPING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT TAGS ANSI COMPLIANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices. 1.02 SCHEDULES A. Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8- 1/2"x11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification. Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Systems; W.H. Brady; Industrial Safety Supply; or Seton Name Plate. 2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: SNAP-ON TYPE A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded, pipe markers, complying with ANSI a13.1. 2.03 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: PRESSURE-SENSITIVE TYPE A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2.04 UNDERGROUND - TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKER A. Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic type, intended for direct-burial service, not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. 15190- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.05 PLASTIC VALVE TAGS A. Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. 2.06 VALVE TAG FASTENERS A. Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S- hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 2.07 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES A. For each page of the valve schedule, provide a glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of extruded aluminum or plastic with SSB-grade sheet glass or plastic. 2.08 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS A Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. 2.09 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identifications work, with corresponsing designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation;painting or otherwise covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 15190- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Ductwork Identification: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with stenciled or plastic-laminate signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color). 1. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50' spacings along exposed runs. 2. Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic-laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. 3. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at Installer's option. C. Piping Identification: Install pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: D. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows; wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non- accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except 15190 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. E. Valve Identification: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. Lit each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. F. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer. G. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Install plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: 1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2. HVAC units. 3. Terminal Units: (Exhaust Fans). 15190 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Armstrong World Industries; CertainTeed; Knauf Fiber Glass; Manville Products; Owens-Corning Fiberglass; Pittsburgh Corning; or Rubatex. 2.02 FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION A. ASTM C 547, Class 1. 2.03 JACKETS FOR PIPING INSULATION A. ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. 1. Encase piping fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fittings covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations. For connections to hot equipment such as boilers and hot water heaters, use canvas covered fitting joints. 2.04 STAPLES, BANDS, WIRES AND CEMENT A. As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.05 ADHESIVES SEALERS AND PROTECTIVE FINISHES A. As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 15260 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.06 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATIONS A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balances cocks, flow regulators, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment. B. Cold Piping: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: 1. Portable cold water piping. 2. Interior above ground horizontal storm water piping. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and Thicknesses of Insulation: 1. Fiberglass: 1" Thickness with vapor barrier. C. Hot Piping: Insulate the following domestic hot water plumbing piping systems: 1. Portable hot water piping. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thickness of insulation: 1. Fiberglass; 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 4". D. Insulate under handicap sink, the waste, and water supplies with Model C50OR Brocar Product, Inc. (1-800-827-1207) or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purposes. B. Install insulation on mechanical systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. 15260- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts C. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulation. D. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. E. At hanger provide 6 lb density insulation resting on 12" pipe saddle of galvanized metal F. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Exposed cut ends of insulation shall not be accepted, all ends shall be beveled and properly capped and sealed. G. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each mechanical system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining run. H. Extend insulation without interruption through walls floors and similar penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulating inserts. For cold pipes, apply 3" wide vapor-barrier tape or band over butt joints. For cold piping, apply wet coat of vapor-barrier lap cement on butt joints, and seal joints with 3" wide vapor-barrier tape or band. J. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, damaged during construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing. K. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. L. Protection: Insulating Installer shall advise Contractor or required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 15260- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install covering and insulation, of the type hereinafter specified, on the following sheet metal ducts, pipes, and equipment. B. All sealers, solvents, tapes, adhesives and mastics used in conjunction with the installation of all insulation specified under this section of the Specifications shall possess the maximum possible fire-safe qualities available and shall be of a type as approved under NFPA #90A and 90B standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. All insulation materials to be furnished for installation under this section shall be as manufactured by CertainTeed, Owners; Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Johns Manville, Knauf or approved equal. B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for all insulation system materials to be furnished for installation under this Section of the Specifications. Submittals shall include a description of the application of all materials to be used for each type of insulation and catalog cuts of all materials furnished. C. All ductwork and equipment shall be insulated, as specified, and as indicated on the Drawings. D. All supply and return air ductwork above ceiling from HVAC units shall be insulated with 2" thick 3/4 lb. density, reinforced foil-faced fiberglass insulation. E. Exhaust ductwork from dishwasher room shall be insulated with 1'/2" thick 3/4 lb density, reinforced foil-faced fiberglass insulation. F. Joints and seams shall be taped with 4" wide foil-faced tape to make a complete vapor tight installation. Insulation shall be secured to ducts, exceeding 24" width, with stick pins and washers and adhesive to prevent sagging. 15290- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts G. Kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be insulated with approved fire rated 2" thick insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be applied in a workmanlike manner so as to provide a neat and smooth surface suitable for painting. Work and/or material that is poorly done, or done in a manner not conforming to the Specifications and/or Drawings shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Architect. B. Insulation shall not be applied to ductwork, and related equipment until the system have been proven tight and pressure tested. C. Sections of ductwork and equipment may be covered as the work progresses, provided the preceding requirements have been met for pressure testing and tightness. D. All ductwork, and equipment to be covered shall be clean and dry prior to application of insulation. E. Insulation shall not be applied when ambient temperatures within the spaces are below 40 degrees F. F. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted. G. All voids and/or seams in insulation shall be filled with insulation cement. H. All insulation ends shall be finished to a 45 degrees bevel with insulation cement troweled to a neat and smooth finish. I. Equipment nameplates, labels and equipment access doors shall be left exposed with insulation edges finished. 15290- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ADD ALTERNATE #1) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. All work of this section is specifically subject to the General and Supplementary conditions for the entire project. Particular attention is directed to those provisions which pertains to the substitution of other materials, products or manufacturers for those specified herein. 1.02 INTENT A. Furnish and install all labor and materials, including all incidentals required, to provide a complete sprinkler system to make a 100% approved automatic sprinkler system to cover the new building specified herein and required by pertinent construction codes. System shall be adequately sized and branch outlet provided for future extension into the adjoining existing building. B. The building will be constructed with ventilated attic of wood construction. Sprinkler system shall be dry pipe and will have sprinklers below and above the ceiling to protect roof structure. C. This Contractor shall base his hydraulically designed system based on the water test at the closest hydrant to the property. This water test shall be conducted by this Contractor. 1.03 CODES AND PERMITS A. All work under this contract shall comply fully with requirements, rules and regulations of agencies having jurisdiction and I.O.S. Commercial Risk Services. B. Any work done which has to be changed to conform with regulations and codes shall be made at the Sprinkler Contractor's expense. C. Any conditions noted in Plans and Specifications which would be contrary to such regulations shall be brought to the attention of the Owner and Engineer before work is installed. 15300 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Required permits and fees shall be obtained and paid for by the Sprinkler Contractor. E. Submit detailed construction drawings, have them approved by agency having jurisdiction before installation, obtain certification of inspection and approval from same agency. F. The Sprinkler System Scope of Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Complete and detailed working drawings. 2. Drain and test connections. 3. Sprinklers, pipes and fittings. 4. Wet valve, alarms and tamper switches. 5. Dry valve, alarms, temper switch and air compressor. 6. Pipe sleeves, escutcheons. 7. Supports, hangers, inserts. 8. Valves and gauges. 9. Valves seals, tags and charts. 10. Compressors and operating controls; (when required). 11. Reduced pressure backflow preventers or backflow preventers. 12. Accelerators; (when required). 13. A test certificate for above ground piping and for underground piping presented to the fire department prior to inspection. 14. A set of hydraulic calculations and coordinated drawings submitted to the fire department. 15. A post or wall indicating valve provided and installed where requested by the 15300-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts fire department. indicating valve furnished and installed by Sprinkler Contractor. (Post or wall indicating valves shall be supplied with system tamper switches). 16. Fire Department connection. 17. Fire suppression control valves located in a separate room or concealed space. A sign shall be provided on the entrance door or near concealed space. The lettering for said sign shall be red and at least four (4) inches in height and shall read, "SPRINKLER CONTROL VALVE ROOM". 18. All valves in the sprinkler system shall have permanent tags indicating their purpose. 19. A legend at the main shut off valve indicating location of shut off valves and inspection test valves. 20. Sprinkler system shall have warning and activation signal as directed by local fire department. 21. A low pressure switch installed on the system side of the check valve. 22. OS & Y gate valves with tamper switches installed and connected to a fire alarm system trouble circuit. 1.04 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Sprinkler equipment shall be new and conform to the standards established in these Specifications, and selected from "List of Inspected Fire protection Equipment and Materials", published annually by U.L. and shall bear U.L. approved stamp or label. B. Trade names and specific manufacturer's model numbers define type and quality of materials and equipment required. C. Bid shall include all methods, materials, equipment exactly as specified. D. Uniformity - Unless otherwise specified, equipment or materials of the same type or classification used for the same purpose shall be the product of the same manufacturer. E. Materials, products, etc., not approved may not be used in construction. 15300- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.05 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat, mechanical appearance when completed. Work not approved by the Owner shall be replaced by the Sprinkler Contractor without additional charge. B. All piping, in general, shall be run as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with the building walls and other pipes, and be neatly spaced. Check closely with other trades to prevent interferences. No claims will be allowed for extra work caused by failure to coordinate with others. 1.06 TESTING AND FLUSHING A. After completion, subject sprinkler system to tests required by and in the presence of representatives of agencies having jurisdiction, Owner and Engineer. Conduct, duration, and other details not covered by agencies" requirements, shall be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. B. Provide instruments, equipment, and pay expenses incurred in making test; obtain approvals, certificates. C. The system shall be thoroughly flushed before sprinklers are in place in order to free the system from any stones or other obstructing material which might clog the orifices of the sprinklers. D. Where evidence of stoppage appears in piping or equipment, disconnect, clean, repair, reconnect obstructed parts; also bear cost of cutting, patching and joining work necessitated by such cleaning, repairing. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. The Sprinkler Contractor shall leave the entire Sprinkler System installed under this contract in proper working order and shall without additional charge, replace any work or material he installed which develops defects within one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner and Engineer, including all other work damaged by such defects. B. Any apparatus that requires excessive service during the first year of operation shall be considered defective and shall be replaced. 15300 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.08 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Any questions regarding specifications shall be addressed to the Engineer before the bids close. After the closing of bids, the Engineer's interpretation of the meaning and intent of drawings and specifications shall be final. B. Before beginning work at the building, the successful contractor will have to furnish his own layout for the installation bearing signature of approvals as noted below. He shall furnish to the Owner and Engineer three (3) copies of each of his layout. The layout shall show sprinkler locations and clearances relative to ductwork, piping, conduit, lights, air diffusers, loud speakers, etc. 1.09 APPROVALS A. The Sprinkler Contractor shall obtain approval of the layout of his work from the Agencies having jurisdiction, Owner and Engineer; and shall submit to the above mentioned shop drawings of the entire system. B. After satisfactory final inspection and test by the approving authority, a copy of the Letter of Acceptance shall be filed with the Owner and Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The entire sprinkler system is to be designed for applicable hazard standards. Space in the building has been set aside for water entrances, valve stations, and other associated piping and equipment. B. Locations and sizes of sprinkler mains, risers, branches and number of heads are required. C. Sprinkler equipment acceptable: Reliable, Viking, Grinnell, and Automatic Sprinkler of America, or equal. 2.02 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Sprinkler Contractor's work shall begin at 6" flanged connection left by General Contractor in new Sprinkler Room. 15300- 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.03 DRAIN AND TEST CONNECTIONS A. Install horizontal piping graded to low points and in manner to make it possible to test and empty entire system; provide valves and piping of sizes and in locations as indicated and in accordance with requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 13. B. Extend drain valve discharge pipes to points suitable for drain discharge outside. Terminate pipes so that discharge will be visible. Use sight drain fittings if necessary. 2.04 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinkler Heads: Chrome plated in all finished ceiling areas, standard brass elsewhere, of configuration and rating to match application. B. Furnish number of extra sprinkler heads per code packed in suitable container with special sprinkler wrenches. 2.05 PIPING MATERIALS FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Sprinkler System piping above ground shall conform to NFPA Pamphlet 13. 2.06 ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Support sprinkler piping from building structure by means of hangers, inserts, etc., as required by NFPA Pamphlet 13. B. Hangers shall be clevis type or split ring supported from structural steel. 2.07 PIPE SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide proper sleeves to accommodate pipes passing through walls, floors, partitions, and provide escutcheons at exposed finished surfaces pierced by pipes. Do not cut through any beams without written permission of Structural Engineer. B. Extend sleeves 1-1/2" above finished floor and pack space between pipe and sleeve as recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 13. Provide fire sealant per section 01100 at fire rated construction. 2.08 VALVES 15300 - 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. Control valves for sprinkler system: IBBM, solid wedge gates, rising stem OS&Y for PSI W.W.P. Install at entry stations and with electrically wired, tamper switches. Wiring of each switch to an alarm provided by Electrical Contractor. B. Provide approved gauges as required per NFPA 13 and approving authority. C. Tamper switch furnished and installed by Sprinkler Contractor, wired by Electrical Contractor. D. Valves acceptable: Kennedy, Clow, Jenkins, Walworth, or equal. 2.09 CUTTING PATCHING EXCAVATION. BACKFILL. PAVING. ETC. A. All by the General Contractor. 2.10 PAINTING A. In general, all exposed piping in Mechanical Rooms shall be primed and painted red and stenciled in black letters as "SPRINKLER PIPING" by Sprinkler Contractor. In public spaces exposed piping shall be finish painted by the General Contractor in color as designated by the Architect. B. Concealed piping above ceilings, shall be stenciled as per the piping identification specification with black letters "SPRINKLER PIPING" 15300- 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 13. Provide fire sealant per section 01100 at fire rated construction. 2.08 VALVES A. Control valves for sprinkler system: IBBM, solid wedge gates, rising stem OS&Y for PSI W.W.P. Install at entry stations and with electrically wired, tamper switches. Wiring of each switch to an alarm provided by Electrical Contractor. B. Provide approved gauges as required per NFPA 13 and approving authority. C. Tamper switch furnished and installed by Sprinkler Contractor, wired by Electrical Contractor. D. Valves acceptable: Kennedy, Clow, Jenkins, Walworth, or equal. 2.09 CUTTING PATCHING EXCAVATION BACKFILL PAVING ETC. A. All by the General Contractor. 2.10 PAINTING A. In general, all exposed piping in Mechanical Rooms shall be primed and painted red and stenciled in black letters as "SPRINKLER PIPING" by Sprinkler Contractor. In public spaces exposed piping shall be finish painted by the General Contractor in color as designated by the Architect. B. Concealed piping above ceilings, shall be stenciled as per the piping identification specification with black letters "SPRINKLER PIPING" 15300 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15411 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable portions of BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Pipe Within Building (except below slab): 1. Copper tubing; Conform to ASTM B88, Type L, Hard temper, copper tubing; ANSI B16.22 streamlined pattern wrought-copper fittings, with soldered joints using 95-5 tin-antimony solder. B. Pipes Inside and Outside Building (below ground): 1. Pipe Sizes 3" and Smaller: Copper tubing; Conform to ASTM B88, Type K, soft temper copper tube. No joints permitted below ground. 2. Pipe Sizes Larger than 3": Ductile-iron pipe and fittings; Conform to ANSI A21.51 for Ductile-iron pipe, with ANSI A21.4 cement-mortar lining; AWWA C110 for Schedule 150, ductile-iron fittings, with AWWA C111 rubber-gasket joints. 2.02 VALVES A. Gate, ball, check, and drain valves are specified in separate section 15100. B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body chrome finish, renewable composition disc, tee handle, 3/4" NPT inlet, 3/4" hose outlet with Watts S8C vacuum breaker and wall escutcheon. C. Projecting Non-Freeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze, with chrome plated face, tee handle key, vacuum breaker, 3/4" inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness. 15411-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle or double check valve assembly, consisting of shut off valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Valves shall be approved for the application and submitted for approval to the Town E. Pressure Regulating Valves: Single seated, direct operated type; having bronze body with integral strainer, and complying with requirements of ASSE Standards 1003. F. Relief Valves: 1. Provide proper size for relief valve, in accordance with ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Codes, for indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed. 2. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210 degrees F. and pressure relief at 150 PSI. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards. B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Refer to the separate Division 15 section: Basic Piping Materials and Methods, for general piping installation instructions. D. Install piping with 1/32" per foot (1/4 percent) downward slope towards drain point. 3.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors". Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: 15411-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet and longer. 3. Pipe roller, complete-MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, support on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: Nom. Pipe Size Max. Span-Ft. Min. Rod Size-Inches 1 6 3/8 1-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8 3 12 3/2 3-1/2 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 D. Provide copper clad hangers for hangers in direct contact with copper pipe. E. Support vertical runs of each floor. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Installation requirements for general duty valves are specified in a separate section of division 15. B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2" and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. C. Shut off valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each 15411-3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shut off valves 2" and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shut off valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. D. Drain Valves: install on each plumbing equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping system. For drain valves 2" and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. E. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated, with vacuum breaker. F. Sill Faucets: Install on concealed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Install backflow preventer(s) where indicated, and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Pipe relief outlet to nearest floor drain. B. Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shut off valves, and throttling valve bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by the Plumbing Code. B. Mechanical Equipment connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shut off valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping System Test: 1. Test for leaks and defects as new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. 2. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 15411-4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning and Disinfecting: 1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended, or required prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C601, or AWWA D105. 15411-5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15420 - PLUMBING WASTE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable portions of BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper tube. Conform to ASTM B306, Type DWV for pipe, with cast-bronze, drainage pattern fittings, with soldered joints using 95-5 tin-antimony solder. B. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe. Conform to CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with clamps and gaskets conforming to CISPI Standards 310. C. Burried piping cast-iron soil pipe; Conform to ASTM A74, for service weight, hub- and-spigot soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene compression gasket joints conforming to ASTM C564. 2.02 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2" connections matching piping system; complying with ASSE 1018. Trap primers shall be installed for floor drains were indicated on the Drawings. B. Cleanout plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. Install in ceanouts as indicated, and as required by Plumbing Code. C. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; adjustable round top as follows: 1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Pattern to suit adjacent floor finish. Install in occupied areas. 2. Cast-Iron Top: Pattern to suit adjacent floor finish. Install in unoccupied areas. D. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cleanout plug, stainless steel 15420 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts round cover and screw. E. Vandal-Proof Vent Caps: Cast iron body full size of vent pipe with caulked base connection for cast iron pipes. F. Floor and Roof Drains: Provide floor and roof drains of size and type as indicated. Where size and type is not indicated, select drain to suit installation. G. Drainage Piping Products Manufacturer: Smith; Wade; or Zurn Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Supports and Anchors". B. Insure trench bottoms are smooth, firm, and free from rock throughout the length of the pipe before proceeding with pipe installation. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. C. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. D. Install underground building drains to conform with the Plumbing Code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 15420- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts E. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2 percent) for piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1 percent) for piping 4" and larger. F. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. G. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and; 1. as required by plumbing code, at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees, at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping, at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. B. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. C. Trap and vent all drains connected to the sanitary sewer. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per 15420- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow. Install trap primers to floor drains in boiler room, water pump room and fire pump room. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing code. B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLS A. Inspections: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code. B. Piping System Test: Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. Perform tests in accordance with the Authority having jurisdiction. C. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 15420 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable portions of State of BOCA National Plumbing Code pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures. B. Comply with ANSI Standard A117.1: "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People." C. Comply with Public Law concerning "Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 and the A.D.A." D. Provide factory-fabricated fixtures, fixture supports and trim of type, style and material indicated. Where trim is not indicated, provide fixture manufacturer's trim as indicated by their published product information; or as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. All fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer: See Schedule on Drawings or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards. B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. Locate flush mechanisum on accessible side of water closet. Provide protective covers on waste and water at handicapped sinks similar to Lav Guard by Truebro, Inc., or approved equal. 15440 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts C. Refer to Architectural Elevations for mounting heights of all fixtures. If not shown mount at height as directed by Architect. D. Fasten plumbing fixtures and equipment securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation. E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture or equipment item. F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. G. Seal fixtures and equipment to walls and floors using silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. H. Test fixtures and equipment to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest. 1. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. J. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow and stream. K. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops. L. Clean fixtures, equipment, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. M. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim. N. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by the Owner. 15440- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15488 - GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Product data for each gas piping specialty and special duty valve. include rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions. B. Test reports specified in Part 3 below. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, gas piping installation, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems. 2. State of Massachusetts Gas Code. 3. Requirements of local gas utility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, beveled ends. B. Copper Tubing - Drawn Temper: ASTM B 88, Type K. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Malleable - Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI 131.20.1. B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. 15488 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAG-1 (Silver). B. Joint Compound: Suitable for the gas being handled. C. Gasket Materials: Thickness, material, and type suitable for gas to be handled, and for design temperatures and pressures. 2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150 black malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat; ground joint. B. Dielectric Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 250; malleable iron and cast bronze; with threaded or soldered end connections suitable for pipe to be jointed; designed to isolate galvanic and stray current corrosion. C. Protective Coating: When piping will be in contact with material or atmosphere exerting a corrosive action, pipe and fittings shall be factory-coated with polyethylene tape, having the following properties: 1. Overall thickness; 20 mils 2. Synthetic adhesive. 3. Water vapor transmission rate; a. Gallons per 100 square inch: 0.10 or less b. Water absorption, percent: 0.02 or less 4. Prime pipe and fittings with a compatible primer prior to application of tape. D. Piping in Mechanical Rooms shall be primed and painted yellow and clearly marked with flow arrows and identified in black letters as "GAS PIPING". In exposed areas, the gas piping shall be painted by the General Contractor the color as selected by the Architect and shall be labeled by this Contractor with black lettering indicating "GAS 15488-2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PIPING". In concealed (above ceiling areas) gas piping shall have flow arrows and black letters on yellow background noted as "GAS PIPING". 2.05 VALVES A. General duty valves (i.e. gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section "General Duty Valves". Special duty valves are specified in this Article "Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified. B. Gas Cocks 2" and Smaller: 150 PSI WOG, bronze body, straightaway patterns, square head, threaded ends. C. Gas Cocks 2-1/2" and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 PSI, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. D. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 HZ, Class B Continuous duty molded coil; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils; normally closed; UL and FM approved and labeled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2" and smaller, and with welded joints for 2-1/2" larger. B. Install Type K, Hard-drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints for 2" and smaller, above ground, within building. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. Refer to Division 15 section"Basic Piping Materials and Methods" for general piping installation requirements. B. Concealed-Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in an air- tight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap. 1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above- 15488- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts ceiling spaces (subject to the approval of the authorities having jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. 2. In Floors: Piping installed in floors shall have protective wrapped specified in part 2 above. Piping cast in concrete slabs shall be surrounded with a minimum of 1-1/2" of concrete and shall not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Piping shall not be embedded in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 3. Piping In Partitions: Concealed piping shall not be located in solid partitions. Tubing shall not be run inside hollow walls or partitions unless protected against physical damage. This does not apply to tubing passing through walls or partitions. 4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct, or elevator shaft. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above. C. Install pipe sleeve and seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations, as specified in Division 15 Section 'Basic Piping Materials and Methods". D. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers. E. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may collect, at the outlet of the gas meter, and in a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install drips where condensate is likely to freeze. 1. Condensate drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the drip leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connected pipe. F. Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4" in 15 feet, upward to risers, and from the risers to the meter, or service regulator when meter is not provided, or the equipment. G. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. H. Connect branch outlet pipes from the top or sides of horizontal lines, not from the bottom. 15488- 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3.03 HANGERS SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors". Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: Steel Pipes Size (NPS) Spacing in Feet Min.Rod Size-Inches 1/2 5 3/8 3/4 to 1-1/4 6 3/8 1--1/2 to 3 (horizontal) 12 1/2 3-1/2 to 5 (vertical) (All sizes every floor level) Copper Tubing Size (inch O.D) Spacing in Feet Min.Rod Size-Inches 1/2 4 3/8 5/8 and 1-1/4 6 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 8 1/2 3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual". C. Warning: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 15488- 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Refer to NFPA 54, for guide for number and length of threads for field threading steel pipe. E. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. 3.05 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator. C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if the valve is free; so they can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in a closed position. 3.06 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls. B. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length. 3.07 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shut off valves electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode with NFPA 70 - 15488- 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts "National Electrical Code". B. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. C. Conform to NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and local utility requirements. 15488 - 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15540 - PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Pumps: Provide and install pump of type, capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled. B. Compliances: Provide with electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Bell & Gossett, Taco Co. Armstrong Pump Co., Aurora Pump Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Pumps: Install pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Provide access space around pumps for services as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connections as indicated or required. D. Pumps shall be properly supported and isolated so that vibration noises are not being readily transmitted. E. Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 15540 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15600 - HEATING/VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This Contractor shall furnish and install heating/ventilating and air conditioning unit as scheduled on the drawings or approved equal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Roof top units external cabinets shall be constructed from heavy gauge galvanized steel with backed acrylic enamel finish. Unit shall be equipped with removable insulated panels for access to all components. HVAC shall sit on factory furnished matching roof curbs with roof curb gasket for positive weather tight seal. This Contractor shall coordinate placement of unit with the General Contractor. General Contractor shall prepare roof openings for ductwork properly coordinated with structure and furnish and install auxiliary steel as required by Structural Engineer for the proper support of each unit. Roofing Sub-Contractor shall roof-in curb for a weather tight installation. Roof top units shall be furnished with a direct expansion refrigeration system factory charged. Evaporator coil shall be fabricated of aluminum fins bonded to seamless copper tubes with expansion valves and liquid line filter drier. Compressors shall be heavy duty reciprocating, full or semi-hermetic type with internal overload protection, crankcase heaters, oil failure protection and high and low pressure cutout. Each compressor shall have its own completely independent refrigeration circuit. Short cycling or compressors shall be prevented through timing circuit. Two stage control and low ambient operation to 0 deg. Fahrenheit shall be standard. Roof top units shall be furnished with gas furnace heater two stage, indirect fired, automatic spark ignition, suitable for natural gas. Furnace shall have a power forced draft combustion system. Gas control shall include a pilot valve, automatic combination main gas valve and pressure regulator, combination fan cycle control thermostat, high limit thermostat flame sensor and automatic relight system. Gas heating section shall be AGA approved. Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install gas piping of size to deliver gas to each unit. Supply fan and return fan, wherever applicable, shall be forward curve, double inlet centrifugal type, belt driven by permanently lubricated motor with inherent overload 15600- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts protection. The motor shall have a variable pitch sheave and adjustable base for proper alignment and belt tension adjustment. Filters shall be 2" permanent cleanable type mounted in a galvanized steel filter frame with access panel for. Provide trap and drain at cooling coil drain pans. Outside air shall be introduced through 0 to 100% outside air economizer control consisting of low leakage outside, return and exhaust air dampers, adjustable potentiometer, damper motor and an adjustable enthalpy controller mounted in the outside air stream. This Contractor shall provide any field labor that may be required for a unit modification to properly adapt economizer, any back draft dampers, rainhood and fan guards and integrate smoke ventilation where required into proper working order. Units shall be factory wired to comply with NEC requirements and shall conform to all applicable U.S. standards. Main control panel shall be of weatherproof construction provided with contractors, overload protection with branch circuits for all components. Each unit shall have 24 volt control circuit transformer and control circuit fuse. Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install power wiring to each unit to weather tight power disconnect mounted external on unit casing. This Contractor shall complete field installation of the power and ground wiring from disconnect to unit terminal blocks. Roof top units shall be controlled from heating, cooling, occupied, unoccupied space mounted programmable thermostat. Gas heating and DX cooling shall be activated as required. Minimum O.A. shall be introduced during the coldest weather and economizer controls with internal relief shall permit up to 100% O.A. during mild weather. Smoke detectors furnished by and power wired by the Electrical Contractor shall be installed by this Contractor within the supply and ductwork of each roof top heating, ventilating and air conditioning units. Control wiring interlock installed by the Mechanical Contractor shall on detection of smoke shut-down the respective unit. 15600 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15860 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air distribution equipment in accordance with AMCA Standards, and provide AMCA Certified Ratings Seal B. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components of air distribution equipment which have been listed and labeled by U.L. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Provide centrifugal fans of type, size, capacity, and arrangement and having accessories as scheduled. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hartzell, Greenheck, Penn Ventilator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fans where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and which recognized industry practices, to ensure that fans comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access and service space around and over fans as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Suspended fans shall be set on vibration isolators, fasten in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Roof fans shall have motors and drives internally isolated for quiet operations and motors protected by weatherproof hoods mounted on 12" high matching insulated roof curbs. D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to 15860- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts Electrical Contractor for power wiring. E. Ductwork Connection: Refer to Division-15 "Ductwork" sections. Provide flexible connections on inlet and outlet duct connections. F. Field Quality Control: Upon completion of installation of fans, and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. G. Adjusting and Cleaning: Start-up, test, and adjust fans in presence of manufacturer's authorized representative. H. Spare parts: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one spare set of belts for each belt driven fan. I. Exhaust fans shall be interlocked with control wiring to operate as scheduled on the drawings. i 15860 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15900 - METAL DUCTWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA Conditioning systems". C. Sheet Metal: Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. D. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall be fabricated to comply with NFPA-96. Acceptable alternate "No Chase" grease duct Model IPIC-1 as manufactured by Metal Fab, Inc., with .035", 304 SS inner liner, .025" aluminum steel outer jacket with 1" ceramic fiber insulation between inner and outer liner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK A. Exposed Ductwork materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Handle materials to avoid denting. B. Miscellaneous Ductwork materials: Provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements. 1. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 deg. laterals and 45 deg. elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg. branches are indicated, provide conical type tees. 2. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant. 15900- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 3. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement. C. Ductwork Support Materials: Provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. D. Flexible Duct: Spiral insulated type. E. Manufacturers: Buckley Associates, Flexaust, Duro Dyne. F. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". G. Fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to 1.5X associated duct width, and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers. 2.02 FACTORY FABRICATED LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK A. Materials: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with "Paint Grip" galvanized steel coating for ductwork in exposed locations. Exhaust ductwork from Dishwasher Room shall be fabricated on aluminum to standard SMACNA sheet gauges and sealed water tight. B. Gauge: 26-gauge minimum for round ducts 3" through 14" diameter. 24-gauge 15" through 26" diameter; 22-gauge 27" through 36" diameter; 20-gauge 37" through 50" diameter. C. Elbows: Die-stamped construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbow 8" and smaller. Pleated construction for 30 deg., 45 deg., 60 deg. and 90 deg. elbows. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. D. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg. tees, constructed with tap solid welded to duct fitting body. E. Manufacturers: Unit Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. 15900 -2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Standards and practices which will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectional noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/3" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to shape to prevent buckling and undue noise generation. 1. Meet SMACNA Seal Class C Standards. 2. Routing: Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1.2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. 3. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. 4. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 5. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide fire stopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division-7 section "Fire Stopping" and install UL rated fire dampers. 6. Provide and install air extractors and all take-offs from main duct, splitters at "T"junctions and volume dampers in branch ductwork serving diffusers, registers and grilles 7. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. 15900- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Each ductwork riser shall be tested for leaks before dry wall work is installed. Test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. C. Installation of Flexible Ducts: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6'-0" extended length. Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. D. Equipment Connections: Provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors. E. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debries. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal. 3.02 TEMPORARY CLOSURE A. Provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. 3.03 BALANCING A. Refer to Division-15 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork, not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. 15900- 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire and smoke/fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 and UL Standard 5555. D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPERS A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi-blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". B. Control Dampers: Provide control dampers of type and size indicated. If not indicated, provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed blades for modulating control with soft seal blade edges for tight closure. Construct blades of 16-gauge steel, provide heavy-duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2"x1/2"x1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4' xl-1/4"x16 gauge channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up. C. Counter balanced Relief Dampers: Provide relief dampers of type and size indicated. If not indicated, provide dampers with parallel blades, counter balanced and factory-set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16 gauge aluminum, provide 1/2" diameter 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. 15910- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Construct frame of 2"x1/2"x1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4"x1-1/4"x16 gauge channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with aluminum touch-up. E. Manufacturers of Dampers: Arrow Louver and Damper; Louvers & Dampers; Penn Ventilator, or Vent Products. F. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 deg. F. unless otherwise indicated. provide damper with positive lock in closed position. Provide ductwork access panels to serve fusible ceilings as may be necessary. G. Fire/Smoke Dampers: Provide fire/smoke dampers in types and sizes indicated. Provide reusable UL listed electric link/mechanical lock rated at 165 deg. F. unless otherwise indicated. Provide link activated by either a signal from the fire alarm system or excessive duct ambient temperature. H. Manufacturers of Fire and Fire/Smoke Dampers: Prefco or Ruskin. 2.02 VANES A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" O.C., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" O.C., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork. C. Manufacturers of Turning Vanes: Aero Dyne; Airsan; Anemostat; Barber Colman; Duro Dyne; Environmental Elements; Hart & Cooley. 2.03 DUCT HARDWARE A. Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 2.04 QUADRANT LOCKS A. Provide for each damper, extractor or splitter quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; 15910- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. B. Manufacturers: Ventfabrics; or Young Regulator. 2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide where indicated. Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors. B. Furnish ductwork access doors upstream and downstream of ductwork heating coil and at humidifier. The access panel downstream side at humidifier shall have a vision panel to observe moisture delivery. C. Manufacturers: Air Balance; Duro Dyne; Register & Grille; Ruskin; Ventfabrics; or Zurn Industries. 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. B. Manufacturers: American/Elgen; Duro Dyne; Flexaust; or Ventfabrics. 2.07 REGISTERS. DIFFUSERS & GRILLES A. Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be of the model, size, capacity and type indicated on the drawings or as scheduled herein. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Krueger, Titus, Metal Aire, or approved equal. B. All registers and diffusers shall be furnished with individually adjustable volume control dampers. C. Diffusers, registers, and grilles for installation in gypsum ceilings or walls shall be provided with sponge rubber frame gaskets and Phillips head screws for attachment of the device frame to the ductwork frame which will protrude and be flush with adjoining 15910- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts ceiling or dry-wall. D. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be of aluminum. The finish shall be factory- applied paint. The color shall be a manufacturer's standard; color shall be selected by the Architect. E. This Contractor shall paint the interior surface of ductwork behind all grilles, registers and diffusers within line of sight through the air devices. Paint shall be flat black in color. F. This Contractor shall paint the interior surface of ductwork behind all grilles, registers and diffusers within line of sight through the air devices. Paint shall be flat black in color. G. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on all registers, grilles and diffusers to be furnished showing model number, size, blow, room locations and accessories. H. Exhaust registers for toilets and return air for general areas shall be of aluminum, finished in off-white enamel, 45 degrees louvers spaced at 3/4" with flanged border concealed fasteners. Louvers shall be fixed parallel in long direction. Each register shall have integral opposed blade damper. 1. Ceiling diffusers shall be similar to Titus Co., Model TDCA with opposed blade damper or as noted on the drawings. J. Linear type diffusers shall be similar to Titus Co., Model ML-38 with vane control and blank sections are to be provided as indicated on the drawings. K. Manufacturers of Registers Diffusers & Grills: Titus Co.; Metal Aire Co., Hart & Cooley and Krantz Co. 2.08 LOUVERS A. This Contractor shall furnish louvers where shown on the Drawings. Louvers shall be as manufactured by Airolite Co., Titus, Dowco Corp., or approved equal. Louvers shall be installed by the General Contractor. B. All louvers shall be of extruded aluminum, storm proof construction with 4' deep blades and aluminum bird screen. Frames shall be designed for mounting in indicated construction. Louver core shall be demountable with the frame remaining in place. 15910- 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts Finish shall be prime coat and factory painted with color selected by the Architect. Exact sizes and mounting heights are shown on the Architectural Drawings. C. Brick or block vent louvers shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. 2.09 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended functions. B. Install turning vanes in elbows in supply and exhaust air systems as specified in Division-15 "Ductwork" Section. C. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance. D. Install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action and access doors to service fusible links. E. Label access doors in accordance with Division-15 Section, "Mechanical Identification". F. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing". 2.10 CLEANING A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. B. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range. C. General Contractor shall prime and finish paint all exposed ductwork in classrooms and Multi-purpose room. 15910- 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15971 - CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Provide control sequences as specified in Division -15 for specified equipment and as described herein. B. Refer to Division-16 Sections for the following work; not work of this section. C. Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Installation of starters, disconnect, and other electrical devices furnished by Mechanical Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL STANDARDS A. Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed, and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Barber-Colman; Honeywell; Andover Controls; Landis Gyr/Powers. E. Installation by : Manufacturer only. 2.02 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM A. Automatic temperature control system shall be electrical. All wiring between units shall be by Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. 15971 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. With the exception of valves and dampers, all control equipment and electric wiring in connection with the temperature control system shall be installed by the control equipment manufacturer. Automatic valves shall be furnished by the control equipment manufacturer and installed by Heating and Ventilating Contractor under his supervision. Automatic dampers shall be furnished by the control equipment manufacturer and installed by the Sheet Metal Subcontractor under his supervision. The temperature control system shall consist of all thermostats, valves, relays, control panels, dampers, damper motors, switches, piping, wiring and other accessories necessary to fulfill the intent of the Specifications. C. Space thermostats shall be low voltage type adjustable throttling range, locking covers concealed adjustments, and include thermometers. D. Insertion thermostats shall be remote bulb or rod - and - tube type, and shall include separable well when installed in water lines. E. Damper and valve motors shall be capable of providing smooth proportional control under all operating conditions. All activators shall be provided with positive positioning, relays or sequencing relays. Control valves shall have self-adjusting packing, equal percentage throttling plugs, stem travel indicators, removable discs, screwed body for 2" and smaller, flanged body for 2-1/2" and larger and shall be sized by the manufactured for the design conditions. Copper sweat bodies are acceptable. F. Automatically controlled dampers shall be louver type if two-position, opposed blade if modulating, 10" maximum width 16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed blade, 2" channel frame, brass or nylon bearings and hot dip galvanized outdoor air and exhaust relief damper. Blades shall have low leakage blow-up seals. G. Duct and immersion thermostats of the single input type shall have integral set-point adjustments and throttling ranges adequate for the application. Duct thermostats shall have sensing elements of sufficient length and accuracy to measure average duct temperature in each location. H. Aquastats - shall be line voltage type with single pole, single throw switching. Switches shall have an adequate rating for the applied load. 2.03 START-UP A. Start-up test and adjust control systems. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning control equipment. 15971 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 2.04 CLEANING A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 2.05 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT A. After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided as work of this section. 2.06 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS B. Provide services of control system installer for not less than 8 hours on-site to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of control system. 2.07 GUARANTEE: (Supplement of Guarantee and other Contract Documents) A. A complete workable system shall be provided. The entire temperature control system shall be kept in proper operating condition for one year from the date of final certificate in this project at no additional cost to the Owner. The ATC-CM shall submit written evidence to the Engineer that his office is satisfied with the installation to the extent that it was installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings. B. Guarantee shall include a minimum of two (2) preventative maintenance checks per year (for one year). The preventative maintenance check shall include: 1. Calibration check of control devices provided by this trade. 2. Check all water schedules, set points, etc., and all sequence of operation for systems provided by this trade. 3. Perform all maintenance required on control devices provided by this trade. 4. These maintenance checks shall be performed in the company of the Owner's maintenance representative, so that at the end of the one year, they are thoroughly familiar with the maintenance and operation requirements of the various systems and devices. The maintenance checks shall be performed by a factory trained field service engineer in the regular employ of the ATC-CM. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner during this 15971 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts one year period. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of the installation, the Control Contractor shall submit to the Owner, an agreement to provide the necessary programmed maintenance, to keep the various control systems in proper working condition. B. This programmed maintenance agreement shall fully describe the maintenance work to be performed and shall advise the cost of this work during the guarantee period, as well as for subsequent years thereafter. 15971 - 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15985 - SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS A. Sequence of controls shall be described on the drawings or in particular sections of these specifications and as described herebelow. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXHAUST FANS A. See operating sequence as described in fan schedule on drawings and in fan section of this specification. 2.02 HVAC UNITS A. Programmable remote wall mounted heating/cooling thermostats with occupied/unoccupied cycle with fan ON-OFF-AUTO sub base shall control the gas heating section of each roof top unit or the DX cooling section. Unit economizer controls shall admit outside air for cooling and overriding refrigeration cycle. B. In occupied cycle unit outside air damper shall open to minimum 20% (adjustable) open position. C. In unoccupied cycle outside air damper shall remain closed and unit shall cycle to maintain desired reset space temperature. D. Safties: Upon detection of smoke by duct smoke detector in discharge of unit the roof top unit fan shall stop functioning. 2.03 PUMP A. Hot water recirculation at hot water heater shall be actuated by aquastat up stream of pump to maintain 110 deg. F. loop temperature (adjustable) 15985 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 15990 - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Test, adjust, and balance all air and hydronic mechanical systems. B. Verify temperature control system operation. C. Prepare preliminary balancing report and submit to Engineer. Include recommendations for correcting any balancing, noise or vibration problems. D. Following engineering review, attend site meeting with Mechanical Contractor and Engineer/Architect to make adjustments and supplementary measurements as required. E. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractors shall carry in his price cost of initial balancing, and subsequent problem resolution on heating or cooling season and final testing and balancing. F. Submit final balancing report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGINEER AND TECHNICIANS DATA A. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified. 2.02 REPORT DATA A. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the signature of the Test and balance Technician. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standard. B. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data: 15990- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1. General Information and Summary: Identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Include a certification sheet containing the name address, telephone number, and signature of the Test and Balancing Technician. 2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. 2.03 TEST AND BALANCE TECHNICIANS QUALIFICATIONS A. An independent consultant having at least 3-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experienced on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project. 2.04 AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS B. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. 2.05 CODES AND STANDARDS AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems". ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 2.06 SYSTEMS OPERATION A. Systems shall be fully operations prior to beginning procedures. 15990 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. C. Mark equipment settings, including valve indicators, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials. D. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. E. Air systems ductwork shall be progressively pressure tested to assure main and branch ductwork is capable of delivery air within 5% of design. F. Subsequently each air system shall be placed into operation. All automatic temperature control functions should be verified to be operational. Fan rotation should be checked. Each system should be checked for "occupied/unoccupied cycle operation. G. Air balancing should be performed system by system with related exhausted systems functioning. 15990- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# 16010 ELECTRICAL 1-10 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1-2 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 1-3 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1-2 16125 BOXES 1-2 16130 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES 1 16134 PANELBOARDS 1-2 16135 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1-2 16140 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 1-2 16160 MOTOR STARTERS 1 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1 16190 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1 16400 UNDERGROUND PRIMARY ELECTRIC SERVICE 1-2 16420 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY ELECTRIC SERVICE 1 16425 PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER 1 16450 SECONDARY SERVICE METERING 1 16455 SECONDARY SERVICE GROUNDING 1-2 16460 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 1 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2 16510 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) SECTION# DESCRIPTION PAGE# 16600 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM 1 16660 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 1 16670 SOUND SYSTEMS 1 16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1-2 16820 DEMOLITION 1 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS A. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. B. Materials shall be as specified herein. Consideration shall be given to other products that in the opinion of the Electrical Engineer, meet or exceed those specified if requested ten (10) days prior to the date of bid opening. C. Any item and/or system submitted, that is not as specified or indicated, shall be accompanied by complete technical data so that proper comparison can be made. Final approval of proposed substituted items shall be by the Electrical Engineer. No exceptions allowed. D. Any item and/or system submitted without said data will be disapproved and the specified item and/or system shall be furnished. E. Filing Sub-Bids 1. The work under this Section is stipulated as a filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the "FORM FOR GENERAL BID". 2. Each Sub-Bid submitted for work under this Section shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BIDS furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of Massachusetts. 3. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at the time and place as stipulated in the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS". 4. The work to be done under this Section is shown on drawings numbered E-1 through E-3 inclusive. 16010- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 5. The filed Sub-Bidder under this Section of work shall list in paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID the names of each person, firm, or corporation whom he proposes to use to perform the Electrical work and the bid price therefor. 6. In any case in which the Sub-Bidder intends to perform with persons on his own staff the Electrical work, he must nevertheless list his own name therefore under paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID, but not his bid price. F. Alternates: Refer to Section 01100 ALTERNATES for alternative work required under this Section. 1.02 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract shall govern work under this Division of the Specifications. B. The term "Contractor" used hereinafter shall designate the Electrical Contractor. C. Before submitting a bid, the Contractor is required to visit the site and survey the conditions likely to be encountered in the performance of the Electrical Work. The Contractor shall review all project documents including Demolition, Mechanical, Plumbing, Architectural, Furniture, Electrical and Equipment drawings and specifications associated with electrical work. Failure to familiarize himself with the conditions shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full completion of the work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. 1.03 WORK TO BE PERFORMED A. Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, devices, electrical apparatus, fixtures, and lamps, etc., and the performing of all operations necessary for the installation of electrical facilities in and about the structures and around the grounds, as indicated on the Contract Documents whether specified herein or not. B. This work shall include all costs involved in providing power to the facility, and metering of same as required by the local utility, all costs involved in providing telephone services to the facility, any costs involved with any other special utilities such as fire alarm and cable television on the project including but not limited to: 16010- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1. Demolition 2. New underground primary electrical service 3. Pad mount transformer installation 4. New underground secondary electric service 5. Secondary Service Metering 6. Panelboards 7. Raceways 8. Conductors and cables 9. Outlet, pull &junction boxes 10. Wiring devices and plates 11. Disconnect switches/fuses 12. Nameplates 13. Grounding systems 14. Lighting fixtures 15. Emergency lighting system 16. Temporary lighting and power during construction 17. Fire alarm system additions and modifications 18. Sound System 19. Empty raceways and boxes for cable television 20. Empty raceways and boxes for Telephone System 16010- 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 21. Disconnect switches and wiring as shown on the drawings for mechanical equipment and kitchen equipment 22. Submittal of Shop Drawings 23. Record Drawings 24. O & M Manuals and Owner Training 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. The work not included in this Division of the Specifications, but related to it is as follows: 1. Painting 2. Plywood mounting boards 3. Cutting and patching 4. Excavation and backfilling for underground utilities 5. Concrete work 6. Telephone wiring, terminations, devices and instruments 7. Control wiring and starters for mechanical equipment, except as shown on the drawings 8. Mounting of duct smoke detectors and interlock wiring to mechanical equipment. 9. Extension of the existing security system into the new addition by the Owner's vendor. 1.05 CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Where referred to, published standard specifications of technical societies, trade associations and governmental agencies, codes and requirements of Underwriters' and 16010- 4 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts Protective organizations; Federal, State and Municipal regulations and codes; and publications of a similar nature shall be the edition enforced by local authorities having jurisdiction at the job site. The applicable requirements of the publications of following organizations shall apply to the work under this section as if fully written herein. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Underwriters' laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) Local and State Building Codes, and all other Authorities having jurisdiction. Massachusetts Electrical Code (MEC). American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Occupational safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Town of North Andover Fire Alarm Regulations Massachusetts Electric Company Standards B. If this Contractor performs any work or furnishes any equipment contrary to any of the above codes, regulations or standards, he shall be held responsible for such violations and shall assume any and all costs arising therefrom for conformance. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit complete shop drawings of all the work to be furnished under this Section, all in accordance with the General Conditions of this Specification. B. Supplemental to General condition, this Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of the materials, fixtures and equipment to be incorporated in the work. Information shall contain specific reference to catalog numbers and shall be qualified in writing as 16010 - 5 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts required. No consideration will be given to brochure or catalog information not specifically designated or referenced to the specification by an identification number. C. In the event that any specified manufacturer's catalog number has been superseded by a new number since the writing of this specification, the new manufacturer's catalog number shall be immediately submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval. It shall be the responsibility of the sub-contractor to notify the Architect and Engineer of any superseded manufacturer's catalog numbers mentioned in these specifications. D. Submittals not keyed to drawings or not bearing the manufacturer's name shall be disapproved. E. The approval of shop drawings by the Architect and/or the engineer does not relieve the Contractor from meeting all of the requirements of the specifications. F. Shop Drawings must be made specifically for this project. Drawings giving only general information will be returned disapproved. G. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of instructional operating and maintenance manuals for all systems provided under this Section of the Specifications. These shall include all catalog data, cuts, etc., identification of manufacturer and source of local distribution, distributor's telephone number, complete parts data, etc. H. This Contractor shall provide the Owner's representative with 4 hours of training with manufacturer's representatives and service technicians present to fully acquaint the Owner's representative with the operation and maintenance requirements for each system. 1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, this Contractor shall keep a set of drawings marked up to record all deviations and changes from the Contract Drawings due to field conditions, change orders, amendments, revisions, addenda and other reasons to represent an accurate record of all work as actually installed. B. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be approved by the Architect before installation. C. At the completion of the work, furnish to the Electrical Engineer a compete set of prints of the original Contract Drawings, revised in a neat manner to reflect all the 16010- 6 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts above changes and represent an accurate record of all work as actually installed. D. The record drawings shall be reviewed by the Electrical Engineer for approval and corrected as deemed necessary. E. After approval, the record drawings shall become the property of the Owner. 1.08 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses or certificates of approval. He shall pay all fees required by and conform to all local, state and federal laws and regulations governing his work, and at the conclusion of his work, he shall furnish the Architect with certificates of inspection from all authorities having jurisdiction. 1.09 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. Temporary lighting and power shall be installed and maintained under this Contract for use by all trades for the duration of construction, complete with all wiring, switches, protective devices and similar equipment as may be required. Arrangements for temporary power with the Utility Company will be made by this Contractor. The cost of power consumption shall be paid by the General Contractor. B. This Contractor shall furnish and install receptacles totaling 1 every 400 square feet or part thereof of floor area and these shall be 20 ampere, single-phase, duplex receptacles, protected by ground fault interrupter branch circuits. C. This Contractor shall provide temporary lighting such that no point in any area where construction is underway shall have less than 30 footcandle on the floor. If work is done after dark the Electrical Contractor shall provide emergency lighting to illuminate the means of egress. D. All temporary work shall conform to the latest OSHA regulations and shall be removed when no longer required. E . Each Sub-Contractor shall provide their own extension cords, not to exceed 50 feet in length, and the temporary receptacles shall allow all work to be reached with such cords. 1.10 QUESTIONS 16010- 7 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. Any questions regarding these specifications or drawings must be addressed in writing to the architect ten days before bids close; after closing of the bids, the Architects interpretations of the meaning and intent of the specifications and drawings shall be made according to the provisions of the General Conditions. 1.11 CHANGE ORDERS A. No change shall be made from the work, equipment or materials as called for by this Division of the Specifications and accompanying Drawings, except on written order of the Architect. When the changes reduce the Contractors labor, materials, equipment or expenses, the savings thus affected shall be used in full to reduce the Contract price. No charge for extra work will be allowed unless such extra work has been authorized by a written order of the Architect, stating the charge to be made for such work. 1.12 TESTS A. After the electrical systems are complete, and at such time as the Engineer may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and the accompanying Drawings. The tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. B. Testing of the fire alarm system shall be as directed by the North Andover Fire Department and State Fire Marshall's office. C. All systems shall be tested and where necessary reworked until free from all defects as directed by the Engineer. 1.13 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall and does hereby warrant and guarantee that all work executed under this division of the Specifications will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of Certificate of Occupancy. B. The Contractor shall further warrant that all materials furnished and work executed are in accordance with all applicable laws, regulations, etc. C. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer, for the Owner, all equipment warranty registrations complete with the date and place of purchase. 16010- 8 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts 1.14 SYMBOLS A. Symbols shown on drawings show approximate location of fixtures, outlet boxes and other equipment. Unless otherwise detailed, the exact location shall be governed by the structural conditions, code required clearances, obstructions, architectural, furniture and equipment drawings. This is not to be construed to permit redesigning systems. All outlets shall be interconnected as shown on the drawings. Locate and install all boxes and equipment where they will be readily accessible. B. Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling plans for exact locations of fixtures, detectors, etc. C. Refer to Mechanical Drawings for exact size and location of Mechanical Equipment. 1.15 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate his work with the Electric Utility Co., Fire Department and Owner's vendors for telephone and cable television systems to insure that his work is terminated in a satisfactory manner. B. This Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings, and foundations required for his apparatus and shall give full information to the General Contractor sufficiently in advance of the work so that all such openings and foundations may be built in advance. He shall also furnish all supports herein specified so the General Contractor may build same in place. In the case of failure on the part of the Contractor to give proper information as noted above, he shall assume the cost of having the work done. 1.16 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. This Contractor shall furnish trailers or movable sheds as needed for the storage of his materials and equipment. Trailers and sheds shall be locked securely to prevent vandalism. The storage trailers/sheds shall be located where directed by the Architect. 1.17 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A. By submitting a proposal, this Contractor warrants that he has visited the site and has examined all General Conditions, all Site, Equipment, Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Electrical and all the Architectural Drawings, and all Specifications to familiarize himself with all conditions and extent of work affecting his respective 16010- 9 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts contract. 1.18 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions of the specified materials, fixtures and equipment may only be made in accordance with the terms of the General Conditions. B. Approval by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve this Contractor or the manufacturer of responsibility for complying with all conditions upon which this design was based, and all requirements of performance, including space requirements, noise levels and special accessories or materials. C. Where this Contractor proposes to use an item or equipment which differs from that upon which design was based, which requires any redesign of construction, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, and/or any part of Mechanical, Electrical, or Architectural layout, all such redesign shall be prepared by this Contractor at his own expense for approval of Architect and/or Engineer. D. Where approved substitutions or deviations require a different quantity, size or arrangement of structural supports wiring, conduit, piping, duct-work, and equipment, from that upon which design was based, all additional items required by the systems shall, with approval of architect, be furnished by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. It is intended that the burden of coordination of these changes be placed on the Contractor making the substitutions or deviations. 16010 - 10 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner by experienced electricians licensed by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts in accordance with the most modern engineering practice and shall present a neat appearance when completed. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces are necessary for proper installation, support or anchorage of cables, raceways or other electrical work, this work shall be carefully done, and any damage to-the_bu_ilding, piping or equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no cost to—the-Owner. B. After installation, all electrical equipment shall be protected to prevent damage during the construction period. Openings on boxes and cabinets shall be left clean, exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and plated surfaces polished. C. It is not intended that the drawings show every fitting, raceway, junction box, pull box, etc., but this Contractor shall be required to furnish without additional recompense all material necessary to complete the electrical systems in accordance with the best practices of the trade and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer whether or not indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. D. Generally raceways shall be run concealed in finished areas and in unfinished areas raceways shall be run exposed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed containers or packages bearing the manufacturer's name and brand designation. All electrical equipment, upon receipt, shall be adequately stored and protected from damage. B. All materials furnished by this Contractor shall be new and shall conform to the standards of Underwriters' laboratories, Inc., in every case where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question. 16100 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment or apparatus for any one (1) system shall be the product of one manufacturer or comprising products of other manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified system. The term "manufacturer" as herein mentioned shall be understood as applying to a company of established reputation in the manufacture of the particular equipment or apparatus from products of his own make or others, and who assumes full responsibility for all products used in such equipment or apparatus. B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, raceway systems, and neutral conductor of the wiring systems shall be grounded. Connections shall be made by suitable ground or lug connections C. Grounding shall be installed in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code and as specified elsewhere in this specification. 16100- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Care shall be taken to prevent the lodgement of plaster, dirt or trash in raceway boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely free of obstructions or shall be replaced. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry are not acceptable as a base for raceway fastenings, nor shall raceways or pipe straps be welded to steel structures. Raceways shall be secured by pipe straps or shall be supported by wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze fastened by wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion bolts on concrete or brick and machine screws or welded-threaded studs on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields or machine screws, if permitted by local authorities. B. Raceways shall be supported at intervals of not more than eight (8) feet and shall have runs installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. C. Raceways shall be secured within 3'-0" of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet of fittings. D. A run of raceway between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting or between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of 4 quarter bends (360 deg., total), including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All interior raceways, exposed and/or concealed in walls or above ceilings, shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) manufactured of light weight cold rolled steel. The exterior and interior of all EMT shall be protected by galvanizing. B. Connections to all motors and vibrating equipment shall be made with Sealtite flexible 16110 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts steel conduit. C. Exterior raceways exposed to the weather or direct buried elbows shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit. D. Raceways run in or under floor slabs and exterior raceways run underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC, unless noted otherwise. Where specified burial depth cannot be obtained encase in concrete as directed by the Engineer. E. Electrical metallic tubing fittings for sizes 3/4" to 2" shall be the set screw type and manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco or Thomas and Betts Company. Sizes larger than 2" shall be double set screw type as manufactured by Raco Company, Thomas and Betts, Steel City or Appleton. Indentor type connectors are not acceptable. F. Connections to recessed lighting fixtures shall be made with flexible steel conduit. G. Minimum size of raceways for branch circuit wiring shall be 3/4". Raceways shall be kept six (6) inches away from parallel runs of flues and hot water pipes and eighteen (18) inches from computer data cables and raceways. Raceways shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two (2) locknuts where required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box, otherwise a single locknut and bushing will be acceptable. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all metal raceways and shall be of the insulating type where required by the National Electrical Code. H. Electric metallic tubing and galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured by Yountstown Sheet &Tube Company, Republic Steel or Allied Tube and Conduit Co. I. PVC conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon Electrical Products, Alpha Wire Corp., or Standard Wire and Cable Co. J. Flexible steel conduit and liquid tight flexible steel conduit shall be manufactured by American flexible conduit, Anaconda, Carol Cable or Electri-Flex. K. Where raceways cross building expansion joints, suitable expansion fittings shall be installed in each raceway and shall be manufactured by Appleton, Killark or O. Z. Gedney. 16110- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts L. Where raceways are exposed to widely different temperatures, conduit seals shall be provided to prevent the internal circulation of air from warm to cold sections of raceways. Seals shall be manufactured by Appleton, Killark or O. Z. Gedney. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Raceways shall be securely held in place, be free of obstructions, water and ice and complete with bushings as required before raceways are considered complete and pulling in of conductors commences. 16110 - 3 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. A complete system of conductors shall be installed in the raceway systems. Line voltage branch circuit conductors shall be#12 AWG-copper, minimum except as otherwise noted on the drawings. Conductors shall be thermoplastic insulated Type THWN, rated 75 degree Celsius, 600 volt except where manufactures of specific equipment require higher temperature insulation. Conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120/240V., 1 Phase, 3 Wire Ungrounded - Black Neutral - White Ground - Green or Bare B All conductors shall be copper. The use of aluminum or copper clad conductors is not permitted. C. Generally single conductors installed in conduit and/or tubing shall be Type THWN insulation except 90 deg. C. or 105 deg. C. conductors shall be installed where required by specific equipment manufacturers to connect to their equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All home runs to panels, all feeders and all branch circuits shall consist of single conductors in a raceway. Conductors shall be manufactured by Southwire, Rome Cable Co., or General Cable Corp. B. All feeders in pull boxes, cabinets, and branch circuits in outlet and pull boxes having more than one circuit, shall have a fiber tag attached, designating the panel and number of the circuit. C. Lubricants utilized for the pulling in of conductors in raceways shall be approved for 16120 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts the purpose and shall be manufactured by Ideal, Anixter, Inc., or Arnoc Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductors shall be carefully handled during installation so as to avoid mechanical injury to the conductor, insulation or covering. B. Conductors for Fire Alarm and Sound Systems shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer, and as described elsewhere in this Division of the Specifications. C. Conductors shall not be installed in raceways until raceways are complete and an insulating bushing is installed on each end. D. Only approved lubricants shall be used, where required, to assist in pulling in of conductors. 16120 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16125 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A Each wiring device or light fixture in the wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit the conditions encountered. Boxes installed where they are exposed to the weather shall be of the cast metal type with threaded hubs. Boxes in other areas shall be of the cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Ceiling, wall and bracket outlet boxes shall not be less than 4-inches square and not be less than 1 1/2" deep. Boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall be fastened directly with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded- threaded studs on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields or machine screws, if permitted by local authorities. B. Each outlet box shall be provided with a suitable cover to suit the conditions encountered and any wiring devices installed. C. This Contractor shall provide a box complete with screw cover at each junction point and whenever required to facilitate the pulling in of conductors in the raceway system. Each box shall be located so as to be accessible at the completion of the project. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of the M.E.C. Article 370, paragraph 18. Where location of boxes require access panels for accessibility such access panels shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Outlet boxes shall be manufactured by Raco, Steel City or National Electric Products Co., pull and junction boxes shall be manufactured by Harry Richmond Co., Keystone or Wheatland/Toltech. 16125 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Approximate locations for boxes are indicated on the plans. Final locations shall be approved by the Architect prior to rough-in and shall be such as to secure a symmetrical layout in the various spaces and avoid interference with other work. Location of boxes for wall switches will depend upon final location and swing of doors. All switches shall be located on the striker side of the door. See Architectural Drawings for specific details and confirm with the Architect before locating boxes. 16125 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16130 - WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Wire connections for wire sizes #12 through #8 shall be made with pressure type twist on connectors with an internal spring. Connections for wire sizes #6 through 1000 Kcmil shall be made with compression connectors. All connectors shall be U.L. listed and rated 600 volts for use with copper conductors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Connectors shall be manufactured by Ideal, Thomas &Betts or Burndy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be carefully stripped from the conductors per the connector manufacturers recommendations. The conductors shall be inserted in the connector and the joint shall be made-up tight to secure the connection and not damage the conductors insulation. 16130 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16134 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Panelboard cabinets shall be of the dead-front safety type, provided with the size and number of single, double, or triple pole branches as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" on the Drawings. Cabinets shall be constructed of zinc-coated sheet steel and shall conform to Underwriters' laboratories, Inc., Standards for Cabinets and Boxes. Cabinet heights shall not exceed 72 inches and shall be mounted so that the distance from the floor to the center of the top circuit breaker will not exceed 6 feet 6 inches. Cabinets shall be provided with trims having_a piano hinge on one side and adjustable trim clamps on the other side. Trims, unless otherwise noted, shall be fitted with hinged doors having combination lock and latch with all locks keyed alike. A directory holder with a clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted inside such door. A neatly typed directory, properly identifying the circuits, shall be mounted in each frame. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Panelboards shall be the circuit breaker type either flush or surface mounted with voltage, phase, ampere ratings and equipped with main lugs or breaker as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" on the Drawings. Main bus bars shall be copper rated 1000 amps per square inch and shall have a current carrying capacity as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule". Neutral bus shall be full capacity and shall be insulated. Bus bars and connection straps shall be bolted together and rigidly supported on molded insulators. B. All panelboards shall be complete with an equipment ground bus with terminals of sufficient quantity to provide a grounding terminal for each branch circuit. Capacity of equipment ground bus shall be 50 percent of the main buses. C. Breakers shall be so arranged and connected to main busses that any adjacent two poles shall be of the two ungrounded conductors and this relationship and sequence shall be maintained for the entire panel. 16134- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts D. Panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D, General Electric or Westinghouse. Panel P-1 shall be Square D "I" line type and other panels shall be NQOD all with bolt-on breakers. General Electric and Westinghouse can supply similar type products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All panelboards shall be provided with engraved nameplates, fastened with screws or rivets. Decals and/or pressure sensitive tape type nameplates are not acceptable. B. All panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer. C. Circuit numbers indicated on the plans are for design purposes only. Actual circuit numbers shall be assigned in the field when the panelboards are energized and the loads in the panel have been phase balanced. Panel directory shall reflect actual circuit numbers assigned by the Contractor in the field as well as any spare circuit breakers. 16134- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16135 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Fuses to be installed in disconnect switches noted on the Drawings shall be U.L. class K5, general purpose type with an interrupting rating of 50,000 amperes minimum. B. Circuit breakers installed in panelboards shall be the bolt-on type and shall be the same manufacturer as the panelboard. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall have an interrupting rating as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" on the drawing. C. Circuit breakers for equipment below kitchen hood shall be provided with shunt trips and wired to disconnect equipment upon activation of the hood fire suppression system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type which will operate both manually for normal switching and automatically under overload and short circuit conditions. The operating mechanism shall be trip-free so that the contacts cannot be held closed against abnormal overcurrent or short circuity conditions. All multipole breakers shall have a common operating handle which shall open and close all poles simultaneously. B. Circuit breakers serving HVAC equipment shall have HACR rating. C. All fuses shall be manufactured by Buss or Gould/Shawmut. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Electrical Contractor is to verify and adjust accordingly all circuit breakers, fuse, raceway and wire sizes required by manufacturers of actual equipment installed that is furnished by another trade under these contract documents. These documents represent 16135 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts information available at the time of design and may not reflect actual requirements of the equipment installed in the field. 16135 - 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16140 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Wall switches shall be of the heavy duty type, specification grade, rated for 20 amperes at 120/277 Volts. Bodies shall be ivory, totally enclosed with screw type wiring terminals. B. All general use duplex receptacles shall be the heavy duty, grounding type, ivory, specification grade rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. C. Other special receptacles shall be rated as indicated on the plans and shall be black where ivory is not available. D. All receptacles for use with special equipment shall match the voltage and amperage requirements of devices considered. The contractor shall ensure that plugs and receptacles are of a matching type. Where required to complete the installation of equipment, this Contractor shall furnish and install suitable cord sets where none are furnished with equipment. E. All receptacles shall have current NEMA blade configuration for voltage and amperage for which they are to be used. F. Outlets shall be installed in locations as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall study the Architectural, Equipment and Furniture plans in relation to the spaces surrounding each outlet in order that his work may fit the other work required by these specifications. G. Device plates shall be installed on each outlet and switch box to suit the device (s) installed therein. H. All interior device plates shall be high impact, ivory, plastic and of the same manufacturer as the devices unless noted otherwise. 1. Where groups of switches are "ganged" together, they shall share one common device plate. 16140 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts J. Generally device plates shall be located vertically with an alignment tolerance of 1/16" except where space is not sufficient to all vertical mounting interior devices, they shall be mounted horizontally with the approval of the Engineer. Exterior weather proof receptacle plates shall be mounted horizontally with the receptacle. Exterior receptacle plates for GFI type receptacles shall be TayMac #60310. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Wiring devices shall be manufactured by Pass & Seymour, Arrow-Hart or Hubbell and device plates shall be of the same manufacturer as the devices, except as noted above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall verify mounting height of all wiring devices prior to roughing in. The right is reserved to change the exact location of electrical devices, so as to meet the conditions of final location of furniture and equipment. Coordinate with the General Contractor, the Architect and Architectural details before installation. B. Raised covers in finished tile, concrete block or similar masonry construction where no other finish is to be applied, shall have 90 degree corners and edges. Boxes in plaster finish shall have raised plaster covers with rounded edges and corners. 16140- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16160 - MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All magnetic motor starters for mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor and power wired by the Electrical Contractor. Control wiring and associated devices shall be furnished, installed and wired by the Mechanical Contractor, unless noted otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall be responsible for line and load connections at each magnetic motor starter; power wiring to and from starters and connections at motor terminals. B. This Contractor shall ensure that all motors run in the correct direction of rotation for the equipment served. 16160- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. All disconnect switches for Mechanical equipment shall be furnished, installed and wired by the Electrical Contractor, unless such equipment is supplied as part of the Mechanical Equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Disconnect switches shall be motor rated, quick make, quick break, heavy duty type with the number of poles indicated on the Drawings. B. Disconnect switches shall be rated for the circuit voltage and shall be the fused or unfused type as indicated on the Drawings. Fused switches shall be furnished with general purpose fuses unless noted otherwise. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 or 3R as required. C. Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Square D, General Electric or Westinghouse. Fuses shall be manufactured by Buss or Gould/Shawmut. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Each disconnect switch shall be located where it is fully accessible and the nameplate shall identify the equipment served. B. This Contractor shall furnish to the Owner (6) spare fuses for each type, voltage and amperage rating combination installed in the building. C. Where 120 or 240 volt, fractional horsepower motors are provided for mechanical equipment, a manual motor switch rated 30 amperes, 120/240 volt, 2 horsepower equal to Pass & Seymour #30AC2-HP or approved alternate, shall be provided in lieu of a disconnect switch (described above) shall serve as the disconnect means. 16170 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16190 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide nameplates for all panelboards, disconnect switches, fire alarm control panel, time clocks, contactors, pull and junction boxes, terminal cabinets and on each other item of electrical equipment noted on the Drawings. Identification of nameplates shall be as noted on the Drawings. Fire alarm boxes shall be painted red. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic engraved to white core with minimum of 3/8 inch higher letters. Nameplates on power equipment shall be black for 120/240V., and nameplates for fire alarm system shall be red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Nameplates shall be fastened with screws or rivets. Adhesives or pressure tape will not be permitted. B. Nameplates shall be manufactured by Seton nameplate Company or approved alternate. 16190- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16400 - UNDERGROUND PRIMARY ELECTRIC SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall install a complete primary raceway system from the riser pole to the pad mount transformer consisting of the following. 1. At the riser pole this Contractor shall provide a ten foot length of three inch galvanized rigid steel conduit above finished grade. 2. At the base of the riser pole this Contractor shall provide two, three inch galvanized steel long radius elbows, one of which shall be connected to the conduit up the riser pole. The other elbow shall be capped above finished grade for future use. 3. From each of these elbows this Contractor shall install PVC conduit which shall be furnished by the Electric Utility Company. 4. At the transformer pad this Contractor shall provide two additional, three inch galvanized rigid steel long radius elbows and provide conduit into primary compartment of transformer pad. 5. PVC conduit from elbow at riser pole to elbow at transformer pad shall be concrete encased by the General Contractor. B. All work shall be in conformance with Electric Utility Company Standards (Massachusetts Electric Company). C. Primary conductors shall be furnished and installed by the Electric Utility Company. D. Terminations of primary conductors shall be by the Electric Utility Company both on the riser pole and at the transformer. PART 2,,- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 16400 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. Underground raceways shall be in accordance with Section 16110 of these specifications and as detailed on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Before excavation begins this contractor shall contact Dig-Safe and confer with the Architect and obtain all available data and plans indicating underground services at the site in the vicinity of the proposed excavation route for the underground raceways. All back charges, if any, by the Electric Utility company shall be included in this Contractor's bid. 16400- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16420 - UNDERGROUND SECONDARY ELECTRIC SERVICE PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. An underground secondary electrical service at 600 amperes, 120/240 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire, 60 Hertz shall be provided at this facility. B. The new underground service shall consist of new underground raceways and conductors from a pad mounted transformer outside the building to the main circuit breaker in Panel P-1. See Drawings for location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Underground raceways shall conform to Section 16110 of this Specification. B. Conductors shall conform to Section 16120 of this Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The underground secondary electric service entrance raceways and conductors shall be installed in accordance with the trench detail shown on the Drawings. 16420- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16425 - PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The pad mount transformer shall be furnished and installed by the Electric Utility Company. The Electric Utility Company shall furnish and the Electrical Contractor shall install a preformed fiberglass transformer pad. Primary connections shall be by the Electric Utility Company and secondary connections shall be by the electrical Contractor. B. Grounding at the transformer shall be by the Electrical Contractor per Electric Utility Company standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary to complete the installation not provided by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation of the pad mount transformer and shall coordinate the work with the electric utility company. Any required power outages shall be coordinated with the Owner 48 hours in advance and shall be at the Owner's Convenience when the building is not occupied. 16425-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16450 - SECONDARY SERVICE METERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall furnish and install a current transformer cabinet in accordance with the Electric Utility Company Meter Department Standards to be located adjacent to panelboard P-1. B. This Contractor shall furnish and install a meter socket in accordance with the Electric Utility company Meter Department to be located on the exterior wall five feet above finished floor to center line, see Drawing E-3 for location. C. This Contractor shall furnish and install an empty 1'/2" galvanized rigid steel conduit directly from the current transformer cabinet to the meter socket for use by the electric Utility Company Meter Department. PART 2 -.PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials furnished and installed by this Contractor for the metering installation shall conform to the Electric Utility Company Metering Department Standards. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of metering equipment shall be as directed by the Electric Utility Company. 16450-1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16455 - SECONDARY SERVICE GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The secondary service neutral conductor and equipment grounding system shall be grounded in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code. B. The service neutral conductor shall be grounded via a grounding electrode conductor, sized as indicated on the Drawings and connected to the water service entrance pipe and supplemental ground rod(s). C. Provide full size jumpers as required around water meter, backflow preventer, valves etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground rod(s) shall be 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long. Rods shall be constructed of C1018 steel with an outer layer of electrolytically applied copper. Rods shall be Weaver #W-348. Ground rod clamps shall be the U bolt type complete with nuts, lock washers, and bolts. All parts shall be high strength, corrosion resistant silicone bronze. Clamps shall be Weaver #VG-20 or #VG-250, as required by conductor size. Equipment by Blackburn or Thomas & Betts are approved alternate manufacturers. B. Pipe clamp at water service entrance shall be the U bolt type of cast bronze with silicone bronze bolts and nuts. Size as required for water pipe. Clamp shall be O- Z/Gedney Series G-000B. The ground clamp shall be attached to the water pipe ahead of all fittings and the main shut-off valve. Equipment by Blackburn or Thomas &Betts are approved alternate manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The grounding electrode conductor shall be bolted to the neutral conductor in the main panelboard P-1 ahead of the main service disconnect means. 16455 - 1 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. The grounding grid at the transformer pad shall conform to Massachusetts Electric Company Standards. 16455 - 2 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16460 - EQUIPMENT GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. All exposed non-current carrying conductive material enclosing electrical equipment or forming part of such equipment shall be bonded together in a positive continuous raceway and equipment grounding system. B. All raceways shall contain in addition to the circuit conductors an equipment ground conductor for each circuit. The size of each equipment ground conductor shall be in accordance with Table 250-95 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. All raceways shall be sized to include the equipment ground conductor as well as the circuit conductors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Each grounding conductor shall be attached to the equipment ground bus in the panelboard and bonded to the equipment or device. Grounding conductors shall have green insulation or be bare copper without insulation and the minimum conductor size shall be #12 A.W.G. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wrapping or looping equipment ground conductors around connectors will not be accepted. For multiple bond wires at pull or junction boxes, they must be twisted together, taped where exposed to live parts, and installed under a solderless lug bolted to the box. Bond wires at panelboards shall be connected to the equipment ground bus with screw connections. For bonds in outlet and device boxes, a single wire from the device equipment ground terminal on the device may be secured to the box using a "G" clip or "Sta-Kon" type lug. For several wires a pigtail splice must be made and a single wire may be used as described above to secure the box bond. At the pigtail splice a "Greenie", grounding wire connector shall be used. 16460- 1 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Lighting fixtures installed on this project shall be the manufacturer and catalog number specified in the "Lighting Fixtures Schedule" shown on the Drawings. Fixtures shall be U.L. listed and approved for damp or wet locations and for use in fire rated ceilings where applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. A full compliment of lamps in the wattage specified shall be installed in each fixture. Special fittings and materials that may be required to support fixtures shall be supplied and installed as well as supports required to secure fixtures in or on ceilings and walls. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Osram Sylvania or Phillips. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be high frequency electronic ballasts with less than 15% total Harmonic Distortion for 120 volt ballasts. Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than 99% and have a sound rating of class "A" or better. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, General Electric, Magnetek/Traid, Universal or Valmont. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures shall be supported independently of furred or suspended ceilings. Fixtures shall be provided with auxiliary equipment including plaster frames, sloped ceiling adapters, etc., as required to mount fixtures in place. Consult with the General Contractor regarding the arrangement of framing members, to permit the centering of recessed fixtures. Consult with the Ceiling Contractor and coordinate fixture locations with suspended ceiling systems and the architectural reflected ceiling plans. In addition coordinate fixture locations with sprinkler, plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning Contractors ahead of construction to avoid interferences with these systems and allow for symmetrical installation of lighting fixtures. 16500- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts B. Recessed fixtures in fire rated ceilings shall be provided with a fire rated five sided enclosure furnished and installed by the Ceiling Contractor of the same material as the ceiling to maintain the fire rating of the ceiling. This Contractor shall coordinate with the Ceiling Contractor for proper installation of fire rated enclosure. C. Mounting height of all wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be determined by the architect prior to rough in. 16500- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16510 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Emergency lighting shall be provided throughout the building, as indicated on the Drawings. Self contained automatic charger/battery units shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings complete with integral lamp heads aimed to provide the required illumination level on the floor of the path of egress. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on drawings for description of fixtures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Emergency self contained lighting units and exit fixtures shall be provided throughout the building. These fixtures shall be supplied normal power from local panelboards. Upon loss of power in the panelboards the self contained emergency lighting fixtures and self contained exit fixtures shall sense the power loss and automatically operate on their emergency battery power systems. B. All self contained emergency lighting units shall be surface mounted. 16510- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16600 - CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The existing cable television system will be extended by the Owner's vendor. This contractor shall furnish and install empty single gang, flushed mounted wall boxes with an empty 3/4" EMT stubbed to an accessible location above the ceiling for use by the Owner's vendor. B. In addition this Contractor shall provide empty conduit sleeves as may be required by the vendor to aid in the installation of system wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Boxes and raceways shall conform to their respective sections of this specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All raceways shall be run concealed and shall be provided with an insulating bushing. B. This Contractor shall verify with the Architect, mounting heights and exact locations of all cable television outlet boxes prior to rough-in. 16600 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16660 - TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Owner's telephone vendor will provide telephone wiring within the building addition. B. At each telephone outlet shown on the Drawings this Contractor shall provide a flush, in the wall, single gang box with 3/4" EMT stubbed up in the wall and turned out and bushed above the ceiling. C. The General Contractor shall provide a 4'x8'x3/a" CDX plywood mounting board in Electric Closet for use by the Owner's telephone vendor. Paint plywood mounting board with two coats of matte gray paint. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Boxes and raceways shall conform to their respective sections of this specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall verify, with the Architect, mounting heights and exact locations of all telephone outlet boxes prior to rough-in. This Contractor shall also coordinate with the Owner's telephone system vendor and provide any and all necessary raceway sleeves required by the telephone vendor. 16660- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16670 - SOUND SYSTEMS ALTERNATE NO. THREE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. A complete sound system shall be installed at this facility to serve the two new large Meeting Rooms. The complete sound system shall be tested and adjusted completely by a qualified installer prior to turning the system over to the Owner. The installer shall also provide the Owner's Representative with a demonstration and training session before the system is turned over to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete sound system consisting of a Lowell L-50-28 sectional wall rack, two Peavey MMA-35T Mixer/Amp, two Peavey RM-2 adapter kits, four Peavey Aux-R Aux Modules„ two Peavey MTP-S Mic Modules, one Rapco RM-PC power strip, one Incel CDC-9300 CD Changer, one Incel PC-9335 Cassette Rec/Player, two Rapco SD 1OF Single Mic Jacks, one Atlas MS- 10CE Mic. Stand, one Peavey PAA-250 Microphone, one Telex RMK-1 adapter kit, one Telex SMI Hearing Assistance System with Antenna HGA-1, three Telex AAR-10 receivers, three chargers, three Telex HED-1 headphone sets, two Sonic Systems Sound Sphere 168 speakers with mounting kits and one Single pole single throw switch connected between amps for selecting operation of one or both room systems. Shielded cable shall be 20 gage twisted pair West Penn#292 and unshielded cable shall be West Penn #226. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.01 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete sound system with all equipment, connectors, boxes, raceways, hardware, cables and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system. Before final acceptance of the system, start-up, test and adjust the system so that it is turned over in full operating condition. 16670 - 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes replacing the existing four zone fire alarm control panel located in the fire station vestibule with a new eight zone panel. The existing fire alarm annunciator located on the front of the fire station shall be modified to add four additional zones to it. The fire alarm equipment and devices shown on the drawings for the new addition shall be added to the new fire alarm control panel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The existing fire alarm system consists of all Fire Control Instruments (FCI) equipment and devices. All new system components to be added to the existing system shall be of the same manufacturer as the existing system and of the manufacturer's latest design compatible with the existing, no substitutions. The local distributor / Manufacturer's Representative is Mammoth Fire Alarm, Inc., (508) 934-9130. B. Prior to ordering materials this Contractor shall submit to the Architect / Engineer for approval a complete fire alarm package consisting of equipment cuts, complete riser wiring diagram and battery calculation for the complete unified fire alarm system. C. This Contractor shall furnish and install all system components necessary for a complete and operating system. D. All wiring for the systems shall be in accordance with the national Electrical Code Articles 760, 725 and 800. All wiring shall be installed in a raceway and all junction boxes and fittings where access to conductors is provided shall have their covers painted red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION 16720- 1 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts A. The operation of a manual pull station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (smoke, heat or waterflow) shall automatically; 1. Sound all audible devices in the system. 2. Flash all visual signals throughout the system. 3. Initiate the transmission of an alarm to the fire alarm control panel located in the vestibule of the fire station. 4. Visually indicate the zone in alarm on the fire alarm control panel and audibly indicate the alarm condition at the fire alarm control panel. 5. Visually annunciate on the system annunciator the zone in alarm. 6. Automatically shutdown HVAC equipment as required. 7. Operate prioritized output to release all magnetically held smoke doors and release kitchen serving window grilles throughout the building. B. The system installation and testing shall be supervised by a Representative of the system manufacturer. 16720- 2 4/2/97 NORTH ANDOVER SENIOR CENTER North Andover, Massachusetts SECTION 16820 - DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall disconnect all power to existing fixtures, raceways and wiring, panelboards, devices, electrical systems and mechanical equipment indicated to be removed within the buildings prior to removal. Refer to Architectural, Plumbing, HVAC and electrical drawings and specification. This Contractor shall remove and dispose of all electrical equipment removed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL A. Demolition work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner per the "Demolition Notes" on Drawing E-2. B. All wiring, raceways, devices or equipment made inoperable by demolition work that are to remain shall be rewired, reconnected and made to operate per the original installation. 16820- 1